Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 264

Title Page

Table of
Contents

Safety

Anthem Generator 1 Introduction

Installation, Operation, and


2 Installation
Service Manual
Models 30-400, 32-500, 40-500, 40-600, and 50-650
3 Calibration
& Adjustment

4 Acceptance
Testing

5 Operation

6 Periodic
Maintenance

7 Trouble-
shooting

8 Component-
Replacement

9 Electrical
Schematics

P/N 8000-ANTHEM-U
Revision G, June 25, 2018 10 Illustrated
Parts List
Copyright © 2018, Del Medical Inc. All rights reserved.

This document is the property of Del Medical Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information
owned by Del Medical Inc. Any unauthorized copying, use or disclosure of this document without the prior
written permission of Del Medical Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Attention: Consult accompanying documents as applicable.

Revision History

Revision Date Reason for Change


A 7-5-2016 Initial Release
B 8-10-2009 Effected the following changes:
• Models 40-500 and 50-650 added.
Calibration procedures changed (mA and kV).
X-ray tubes added to compatibility listing.
• Caution statements about ESD added.
• Wiring diagrams revised.
• Spare parts: added sealing washers to oil level window screws.
C 5-1-2010 Added info on AEC option to all chapters.
D 2-29-2012 Updated Electrical Schematics
E 10-12-2015 Effected the following changes:
• Added 124-5162G1 Board
• Updated Schematics and Assembly Drawings
• Update APR Utility content for version 4.5
• Minor wording, graphic, and layout corrections/improvements
• Added new room interface board support for DR
• Added new Control Console user interface support for DR
• Added Control Console USB connection and cable information
• Drawings & schematics updated
F 10-10-2016 Effected the following changes:
• Option key support
• General and troubleshooting updates
• Minor wording, graphic, and layout corrections/improvements
G 6-25-2018 Effected the following changes:
• Added installation verification and associated forms
• Expanded troubleshooting information
• General wording, graphic, and layout corrections/improvements

Del Medical Inc. www.delmedical.com


241 Covington Drive Phone:1-847-288-7000
Bloomingdale IL 60108 Fax:1-847-288-7011
USA Toll Free:1-800-800-6006
Table of Contents
Safety and Compliances
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
Statement of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
Safety Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Equipment Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Radiation Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Radiation Safety Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
Personnel Radiation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
Radiation Protection Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
Pediatric Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
Hazardous Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Restrictions on Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Product Life and Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi
Installation Verification for Regulatory Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi

Chapter 1 — Introduction
1.1 Document Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3.1 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3.2 Anthem Generator Models and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.3.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.3.4 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1.3.5 X-Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1.3.6 Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1.3.7 In-Table Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1.5 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1.5.1 Power Specifications, by Anthem Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1.5.2 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1.5.3 AEC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1.5.4 System Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1.6 X-Ray Tube Compatibility Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1.7 Identification Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1.7.1 Generator Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1.7.2 Equipment Label Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1.8 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
1.9 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
1.9.1 Prep and Ready States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15

Table of Contents iii


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.9.2 Exposure Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15


1.9.3 kV and mA Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1.9.4 Rotor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1.9.5 Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1.10 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1.11 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

Chapter 2 — Installation
2.1 Pre-Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1.1 X-ray Room Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1.2 Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.1.3 Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.1.4 Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.1.5 Shipment Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.1.6 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.1.7 In-Table Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.1.8 Installation Tools Required: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2.2.1 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2.2.2 Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.2.3 Connecting Components to the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.2.4 Wall Bucky Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2.2.5 Wallstand Grid Cabinet Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
2.2.6 Table Bucky Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2.2.7 Table Grid Cabinet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2.2.8 Tube Rotor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2.2.9 Collimator Power Connections (If Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2.2.10 Table/Wallstand Lock and Other DC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
2.2.11 Collimator Interlock and Door Interlock Connections . . . . . . . . 2–24
2.2.12 Digital Imaging Receptor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2.2.13 Room-In-Use Indicator Light Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2.2.14 Control Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29
2.2.15 High Tension (HT) Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29
2.3 Initial Testing and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
2.3.1 Test Equipment Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
2.3.2 Inspection of the HT Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
2.3.3 Inspection of Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
2.3.4 Inspection of Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
2.3.5 Operational Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
2.3.6 Verify the Door Interlock Safety Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
2.3.7 The Service Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
2.3.8 Installing the Del APR Utility Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
2.3.9 Initial Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48

iv Table of Contents
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Chapter 3 — Calibration and Adjustments


3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2.2 Entering Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.2.3 mA Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.2.4 kV Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.2.5 Pre-Heat Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.3 Managing the APR Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.3.1 Starting the APR Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.3.2 Selecting a Connection Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.3.3 Downloading APR Configuration Data with a Cable or Adapter 3–11
3.3.4 Downloading APR Configuration Data with an SD Card . . . . . . 3–13
3.3.5 Editing the APR Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.3.6 Uploading APR Configuration Data with a Cable or Adapter. . . 3–16
3.3.7 Uploading APR Configuration Data with an SD Card . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.3.8 Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.4 AEC Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.5 Verification of AEC Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
3.5.1 Generator Backup mAs and Reset Function:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27

Chapter 4 — Acceptance Testing


4.1 Acceptance Testing for Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Installation Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.2 Reporting Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.3 Incident Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.2 Acceptance Testing Check Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.3 Form Notes and Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.1 Notes on Reproducibility and Linearity Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11

Chapter 5 — Operation
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 Operator Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Control Console Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.2 Display Parameters and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.4 Power On/Off Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.1 Powering Up The Anthem Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.2 Powering Down the Anthem Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.5 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.5.1 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.5.2 APR (Anatomically Programmable Radiography). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8

Table of Contents v
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5.5.3 AEC (Automatic Exposure Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11


5.5.4 DR (Digital Radiography) Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.6 Setting Default Startup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.7 Making an Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.7.1 Prep and Expose in 2-Point Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.7.2 Prep and Expose in 3-Point Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.7.3 Prep and Expose in APR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.7.4 Prep and Expose in AEC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.8 Generator Exposure Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17

Chapter 6 — Periodic Maintenance


6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1.1 Discharge Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.1.2 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.2 Cleaning External Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.3 Inspecting Electrical Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.4 Inspecting and Re-Greasing the HT Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.5 Verifying the Tube Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.6 Inspecting Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.7 Verifying the Accuracy of kV, mAs and mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
6.8 Inspecting Electromechanical Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6.9 Inspecting the High Voltage Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6.10 Checking Audible and Visual Exposure Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
6.11 Inspecting Fasteners for Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12

Chapter 7 — Troubleshooting
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 Discharge Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.3 Troubleshooting Tables and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.4 Fault Conditions and Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.5 Console Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.5.1 Interlock Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.6 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.7 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.7.1 Filament Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.7.2 Power Relay Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
7.7.3 Main Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
7.7.4 Console Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
7.7.5 IPM Driver Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–57
7.8 LED Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–57

vi Table of Contents
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Chapter 8 — Component Replacement


8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.2 Repair Acceptance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.3 Discharge Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.4 Removing the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.5 Removing the Upper Cabinet Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8.6 Replacing Fuses on the Power Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
8.7 Replacing Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
8.7.1 Single-phase Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
8.7.2 3-phase Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
8.8 Replacing Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
8.8.1 Replacing the Filament Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–13
8.8.2 Replacing the Power Relay Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–13
8.8.3 Replacing the Main Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
8.8.4 Replacing the IPM Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–17
8.8.5 Replacing an IPM Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–19
8.8.6 Replacing the Room Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22

Chapter 9 — Electrical Schematics


9.1 List of Electrical Schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1

Chapter 10 — Illustrated Parts List


10.1 Ordering Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10.1.1 To Order by Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10.1.2 To Order by Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10.1.3 To Order by Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10.1.4 Parts Assistance by Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10.2 Assembly Drawing Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2
10.3 Firmware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2
10.4 Recommended Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3

Table of Contents vii


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

viii Table of Contents


Safety and Compliances

Introduction
Del Medical X-ray equipment meets high standards of performance and
reliability. We enforce strict quality control techniques to eliminate the
potential for defects and hazards in our products.
This equipment provides an adjustable X-ray source for acquiring images of
parts of a patient’s anatomy. Use of this equipment in any other fashion may
lead to serious personal injury.
These safety guidelines are intended to educate the operator on safety issues
to operate and maintain the Anthem Generator in a safe manner.

Warning
Read and fully understand this manual before operating this
equipment. Failure to follow operating instructions can result in
serious injury or death.

Statement of Liability
To prevent excess radiation exposure (primary or secondary) to patients or
staff, this equipment must be operated and serviced by trained personnel
knowledgeable in the required safety precautions. While this equipment is
designed for safe use, improper operation can cause serious injury or
equipment damage. The manufacturer or its agents and representatives
assume no responsibility for the following:
1. Injury or danger to any person from X-ray exposure.
2. Overexposure of patients or staff to X-radiation due to improper
techniques or procedures.
3. Injury or danger from improper use of the adjustable column or tube head
assembly.
4. Problems or hazards resulting from failure to maintain the equipment as
specified in this manual.

Safety and Compliances ix


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5. Damage or injury caused by equipment that has been modified or used in


any application other than that intended by the manufacturer.
6. Damage or injury caused by operation of this equipment by unauthorized
or untrained persons.
7. Damage or injury arising from failure to follow the instructions and
procedures in this manual or associated documents, or from failure to use
caution when installing, operating, adjusting, or servicing this equipment.

Safety Conventions Used in this Manual


Specific safety information is presented in this manual in the form of Warning
and Caution statements. Pay close attention to these statements—they contain
important information on avoiding hazards to you or the equipment.

Warning Statements
• indicate hazards or unsafe practices that can cause severe injury or death.
• appear in bold type.
• have a triangular symbol enclosing an exclamation point, with the word
Warning.
• precede the step or piece of information to which they refer.
• appear as the following example:

Warning
This text describes special safety precautions to avoid unsafe practices
that can result in severe injury or death.

Caution Statements
• indicate hazards or unsafe practices that can cause minor injury, or
product or property damage.
• appear in bold type.
• have a triangular symbol enclosing an exclamation point, with the word
Caution.
• precede the step or piece of information to which they refer.
• appear as the following example:

Caution
This text describes special safety precautions to avoid unsafe practices
that can result in personal injury or product or property damage.

x Safety and Compliances


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Equipment Safety Guidelines


The Anthem Generator is intended for medical diagnostic purposes only.
Observe the following general safety precautions:
• Do not use this equipment for anything other than medical diagnosis.
• Observe all warnings and cautions, stated or implied, in this manual and
the manuals for associated equipment.
• Comply with all safety labels on the equipment.
• Permit only properly trained and qualified personnel to operate this
equipment. Because this equipment is part of a system that produces
ionizing radiation, operators must meet all state and local requirements
and regulations.
• Permit only qualified personnel to access internal parts.
• When planning for and installing this equipment, observe all local and
national regulations, and establish safe exposure procedures.
• X-rays pose a health risk for both patients and operators. Take all
measures to minimize radiation exposure to any persons.
• Routinely inspect all movable assemblies and parts of this equipment
according to this manual.
• Provide protective earth grounding for all components in compliance with
applicable regulations.
• This equipment contains no user-serviceable parts. For service assistance,
contact your service representative.
• Do not defeat or bypass built-in equipment safety features.
• Do not operate this equipment in the presence of moisture.
• Before servicing this equipment, turn off all electrical power to this system
and all its peripheral equipment (tubestand, etc.) at the power sources.
Also, make sure that the power sources are locked out and tagged
“Equipment Being Serviced”. Some components inside the system have
other external power sources, which is why all peripheral equipment must
also be turned off.
• Before operating this equipment, operators must know the location of all
emergency stop switches (if installed), which allow immediate shutdown
in the event of unintended motion or catastrophic equipment failure.
The following warnings and cautions are specific to the Anthem Generator.
Read them carefully—some are not obvious for typical equipment use.

Warning
To avoid serious electric shock, disconnect all generator power and
follow the discharge procedure before servicing, disconnecting high-
tension cables, or removing access panels. Avoid dropping any tools
or objects in the unit.

Safety and Compliances xi


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid the dangerous and cumulative effects of X-rays, minimize
radiation exposure to any and all patients and staff.

Do not operate this equipment in an explosive atmosphere (such as


anesthetic gas). This equipment is not suitable for use in the presence
of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air, oxygen, or nitrous oxide.

To avoid injury when moving this equipment, at least 2 qualified


people are required.

Radiation Protection
Serious detrimental health effects can result from exposure to both short-
term/high-level and long-term/low-level X-rays. Become familiar with the
effects of both types of radiation exposure, and take appropriate measures to
minimize exposure. Some effects of X-radiation are cumulative over a period
of months or years. Most importantly, avoid exposure to the primary beam at
all times.
X-ray facilities typically use lead to shield the radiologist's workstation. The
typical workstation partition is generally effective in reducing residual
radiation to a safe level. Windows in the partition are typically glazed with
lead glass and provide effective protection. Do not leave the protected area
during exposure.
Any object in the path of the primary beam produces scattered radiation,
which can result in a substantial radiation dose to unprotected persons. To
minimize exposure to scattered radiation, use movable lead screens, and
lead-impregnated gloves and aprons. These protective devices must contain a
lead (or equivalent) thickness of at least 0.25 mm. Use such protective devices
for all operators, observers, and/or servicing personnel exposed to radiation
fields of five or more milli-Roentgens per hour.
The X-ray system produces X-rays only when high voltage is applied to the
X-ray tube. When the high voltage is removed, X-ray emission ceases
immediately.
When the distance between the X-ray tube focal spot and the patient’s skin is
decreased, the radiation dose to the patient increases.
Ensure audio and visual communication between operator and patient even
during exposure. This may require video cameras or an intercom.
To minimize risk, ensure that all operating personnel are educated in the
hazards of radiation and understand the safety requirements for X-ray
operation. Review the manuals for each component in the system.

xii Safety and Compliances


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Note: This system may include an anti-scatter grid. For pediactric applications, the
grid can be removed by a qualified service technician. Refer to the service manual for
the pertinent table or wall stand.

Warning
Ensure exposure parameters are set to within safety limits.

Caution
Incorrectly positioning the X-ray tube and collimator can cause the
X-ray field to be misaligned, resulting in an unacceptable image and
the need to re-expose.

Radiation Safety Regulation


Ensure that all operators of this equipment, and their supervisors, are fully
acquainted with recommendations from the following authorities:
• Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH)
• National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
• National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP)
• International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP).
Current sources of information include the following:
• National Council on Radiation Protection Report No. 102 (“Medical X-ray,
Electron Beam and Gamma-Ray Protection for Energies up to 50 MeV
[Equipment Design, Performance and Use]”).
• Current recommendations of the International Commission on
Radiological Protection.

Personnel Radiation Monitoring


Monitoring radiation exposure to personnel provides a valuable assessment
of safety measures, and can reveal inadequate or improper protection
practices or serious exposure situations.
The most effective monitoring method is the use of instruments to measure
the exposure (in rads). Take this measurement at all locations where the
operator may be inadequately shielded during exposure.
Another, less accurate, method is to place film at strategic locations. After a
specified period of time, develop the film to determine the amount of

Safety and Compliances xiii


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

radiation. Fluorescent screens used in a darkened room can also detect


excessive radiation.
Another common method is for personnel to wear film or aluminum oxide
badges that track X-ray dosage.

Radiation Protection Survey


A radiation protection survey must be made by a qualified expert after every
change in equipment or conditions that might increase the probability of
personnel receiving more than the maximum permissible dose equivalent.

Pediatric Use
Exercise special care when imaging patients outside the typical adult size
range, especially smaller pediatric patients whose size does not overlap the
adult size range (e.g., patients less than 110 lb [50 kg] in weight and 59 in [150
cm] in height).
Ionizing radiation exposure is of particular concern in pediatric patients because:
• For certain organs and tumor types, younger patients are more
radiosensitive than adults (i.e., the cancer risk per unit dose of ionizing
radiation is higher for younger patients).
• Use of equipment and exposure settings designed for adults of average
size can result in excessive and unnecessary radiation of smaller patients.
• Younger patients have a longer expected lifetime over which the effects of
radiation exposure may manifest as cancer.
To help reduce the risk of excessive radiation exposure, follow the ALARA (As
Low As Reasonably Achievable) principle and seek to reduce radiation doses to
only the amount necessary for clinically adequate images.
If available on your system, utilize the following features (and their pediatric-
appropriate settings):
• filters
• grid or Bucky
• protocols or exposure indices
• variable focal spot size
• Automatic Exposure Control (AEC)
• DAP meter
Also, ensure that all testing and calibration procedures include measurements
and adjustments for pediatric settings.
For additional guidance, refer to these resources:
• The Image Gently Campaign: http://www.imagegently.org.
• FDA resource on Pediatric X-ray Imaging: http://www.fda.gov/
Radiation-EmittingProducts/RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
MedicalImaging/ucm298899.htm

xiv Safety and Compliances


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Restrictions on Use
The hardware specified for intended applications of the Anthem Generator
has been selected, tested, and verified by Del Medical to meet applicable
regulatory agency requirements for those countries where it is offered for sale
with respect to its intended applications.

Warning
Do not install components or accessories not intended for use with
this system. Failure to comply can cause injury or equipment damage.

You are responsible for ensuring that the application and use of this
equipment does not compromise the patient contact rating of any equipment
used in the vicinity of or in conjunction with the system.

Grounding
Provide protective earth grounding for all components. All associated
components must be grounded to a common bus according to national and
local electrical codes. Ensure that the earth grounding connections between
this equipment and the host system are maintained at all times.

Wiring Safety Information


• During installation, make sure that all protective ground wire connections
are completed before the equipment is turned on.
• It is required that a separate line disconnect and current limiting device be
provided for wallstand and table power.
• Regulations of professional associations concerning safety and accident
prevention must be observed.

Product Life and Disposal


The system has an estimated life of 10 years from the date of purchase. This
may vary depending on the product use, product maintenance, and
environmental conditions. When disposing of the system, you must comply
with local regulations due to the presence of potentially hazardous materials.
The system contains electronic components, such as soldered circuit boards
(which may contain lead), tinned copper wire, transistors, diodes, resistors,
capacitors, etc. The cabinet is made from steel and/or aluminum.
Note: Do not incinerate this product or place it in trash destined for landfills.
Disposal of this product must adhere to local ordinances and regulations. Contact
local authorities for proper disposal and/or recycling options for all of the components
listed above.

Safety and Compliances xv


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Hazardous Materials
The X-ray tube, PCBs, and collimator used with this equipment contain lead
and oil. Refer to the equipment manuals or contact Del Medical for additional
information regarding use and disposal of hazardous materials.

Acceptance Testing for Regulatory Compliance


Required safety- and compliance-related installation actions include the
following activities:
• installation inspection per documented criteria
• installation approval
• creation and delivery of an acceptance report document
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Acceptance Testing”

xvi Safety and Compliances


1 Introduction

Introduction
1
1.1 Document Information
This manual provides installation, operation, calibration and service
information for the Anthem Generator. For specific information regarding the
operation and service of the tube, collimator, stands, tables, and other
components, see their respective manuals.

1.2 Introduction
The Anthem generator is a high-frequency X-ray generator designed for
general radiographic applications. Features include a user-friendly operator’s
Control Console, programmable APR operation, and optional support of
Digital Radiography, Automatic Exposure Control (AEC), and veterinary
APR techniques.
All persons operating or servicing this equipment must read this manual
before performing tasks. You must have a thorough understanding of the
Anthem generator and its proper use before making radiographic exposures.

Figure 1-1. Anthem Generator and Control Console

1 Introduction 1-1
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.3 Description
The DR-ready Anthem generator is intended for use as part of radiographic
stationary X-ray systems. As part of a typical system, the generator provides
power and control for other parts of the system, as shown in Figure 1-2.
X-ray
tube
high collimator
voltage
supply voltage ion image
Anthem chamber receptor
generator (AEC)

table/wallstand,
interlock functions, or
Control Bucky/DR prep/expose
Console interface
PC or DR
Workstation

Handswitch or
Footswitch
Figure 1-2. Anthem generator integrated into an X-ray system

The Anthem family of generators uses multi-pulse high-frequency technology


to produce waveforms near constant potential.

1.3.1 General Features


• Menu driven Control Console with multifunction buttons for quick,
intuitive navigation and maximum user flexibility.
• Back-lighted liquid crystal display is easy to read from almost any angle
or lighting condition.
• Realtime anode heat calculator displays percentage of heat units.
• Individual control of kV, mAs, mA and time with the availability of both
two-point and three-point operating modes.
• Closed-loop kV and mA stabilization.
• Automatic line voltage compensation.
• Tube protection circuitry.
• Space-saving design for versatile installation.
• UL 60601 Compliant.
• SD memory card slot. and PC connection for configuration editing and
backup.
• Prep/Expose handswitch (standard) or footswitch (veterinary).

1-2 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.3.2 Anthem Generator Models and Options


The Anthem generator is available in the following models:
• 30-400; 30 kW, 400 mA, single phase
• 32-500; 32 kW, 500 mA, three phase
• 40-500; 40 kW, 500 mA, single phase
• 40-600; 40 kW, 600 mA, three phase
• 50-650; 50 kW, 650 mA, three phase
For any of the models listed above, the following options are available:
• Automatic Exposure Control (AEC)
• Digital Radiography (DR) support (replaces APR)
• Control console wall mounting bracket
• Control console pedestal
• Physical installation into an X-ray table, such as the Del Medical RT100

1.3.3 Operation
The Anthem generator operates in one of four modes:
• APR (Anatomically Programmed Radiography). Select from pre-
programmed techniques based on body region, examination type, and
patient size. You can then modify mA, kV, and/or time parameters and
save these customized settings. Veterinary techniques are available for
veterinary-configured systems.
• Manual 2 point. Set mAs and kV parameters. The Anthem software
automatically chooses the highest mA and shortest time to reduce motion
and deliver high quality images.
• Manual 3 point. The traditional 3 point selection of kV, mA and time
accommodates the needs of specialized views and the preference of some
technologists.
• DR (Digital Radiography). This optional mode replaces the APR mode.
Use the DR mode when interfacing a DR workstation and DR detector
devices. Technique parameters on the DR workstation also display at the
Control Console in real time.
The Anthem generator Control Console can also be placed in the following
support modes:
• Administrator Mode. Use this mode to set default parameter values.
• Service Mode. For use by service personnel only. Use this mode to set
options, configure the system, and perform calibration.

1 Introduction 1-3
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.3.4 Architecture
The X-ray generator consists of an upper main power cabinet, a lower cabinet,
and a control console.
The upper main power cabinet contains the inverter, the filament drivers, the
power supply, the Main Control board, and interface connections to the room
equipment.
The lower cabinet contains the HT Tank, and, for 3-phase systems, the line
match transformers.
The control console allows the operator to select/program technique factors,
configure features, and prep/initiate an X-ray exposure via handswitch,
footswitch, or console panel buttons.

1.3.5 X-Ray Tube


The Anthem generator is shipped with tube loading programs specifically
designed for the individual X-ray tubes approved for use. The programs are
based on focal spot size and anode heat dissipation of the tube insert to be
used. Tube inserts with load capacities other than those for which the Anthem
generator was configured may be permanently damaged if used with the
incorrect tube loading program. Consult Del Medical Inc. for additional
information. Refer to “X-Ray Tube Compatibility Listing” on page 1-10 for a
list of compatible tubes.

1.3.6 Power Requirements


Depending on the purchased configuration, the Anthem uses either a single-
or three-phase power line (for more details, see Chapter 2, “Installation”).

1.3.7 In-Table Installation


The Anthem generator can be installed inside a Del Medical RT100 Float-Top
table. For in-table installations, the lower cabinet is not used, and the Power
Module and HT Tank are placed side by side. For 3-phase in-table
installations, the line matching transformers reside in an enclosure that is
external to the table.

1-4 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.4 Dimensions

17.5”
444 mm

28”
711 mm

19.5”
495 mm

27”
686 mm

Figure 1-3. Cabinet dimensions

For in-table generators, the lower cabinet is replaced with 2 enclosures of the
following dimensions: .

Unit Width Depth Height


HT Tank 15” (38.1 cm) 15.25” (38.7 14.5” (36.8 cm)
cm)
Line Match Transformer Enclo- 15” (38.1 cm) 21.5” (54.6 cm) 8.5” (21.6 cm)
sure (3-Phase)
Table 1-1. In-table component dimensions

1 Introduction 1-5
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Ø 0.281” (x4)
Ø 7 mm (x4)
2.75”
70 mm

4.0”
102 mm

Figure 1-4. Optional control console wall bracket mounting hole dimensions

36.5”
930 mm

8.3”
211 mm

Anti-Tip
11.0” Bracket
230 mm

Figure 1-5. Control console floor stand dimensions (rear view)

1-6 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8.5”
216 mm

21.5”
546 mm

15.0”
381 mm

Figure 1-6. 3-phase line match transformer enclosure dimensions

1.5 Specifications

1.5.1 Power Specifications, by Anthem Model


30-400, 40-500, 32-500, 40-600, 50-650,
Specification single-phase single-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase
Input Power, 208/240 VAC, 1 A, 50/60 208/240/380/480 VAC, 1 A, 50/60 Hz
continuous Hz

Input Current, momen- 210/180 A 256/222 A 158/136/86/ 161/142/90/ 200/176/


tary 68 A 72 A 110/88 A
Output power, tube 30 kW 40 kW 32 kW 40 kW 50 kW
Output current, tube 400 mA 500 mA 500 mA 600 mA 650 mA
Output power, locks 24VDC, 4A
Output power, manual 24VAC, 8A, 50/60 Hz, 10% Duty
collimator
Output power, Bucky 120VAC, 1A, 50/60 Hz
Output power, Room-In- None; instead, normally open relay contact passes a nominal 24 VAC
Use lamp
Maximum power tech- 75 kV, 400 80 kV, 500 64 kV, 500 100 kV, 400 100 kV, 500
nique mA, 200 ms mA, 200 ms mA, 100ms mA, 250 ms mA, 200 ms

1 Introduction 1-7
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.5.2 General Specifications


Description Value or Range
Mode of Operation Continuous with intermittent loading (1% duty cycle)
Temperature Limits Transit/Storage: –40°F to +158°F (–40°C to +70°C)
Operating: +50°F to +95°F (+10°C to +35°C)
Relative Humidity Limits Transit/Storage: 10% to 100%
Operating: 10% to 80% Non-Condensing
Atmospheric Limits 14.5 inHg to 30.74 inHg
500 hPa to 1060 hPa
Degree of protection against the ingress Ordinary
of water:
Certifications UL60601-1, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1, IEC60601-1,
IEC60601-2-7
Line regulation ± 7%
Duty Cycle 1%
kV Selection 40 to 125 kV in increments of 1 kV
kV Accuracy Indicated value ± 5%
mAs Selection 1 - 500 mAs, increments of 1.2 x previous value
mAs Accuracy ± (.6 mAs + 5% of indicated value)
mA Selection 25 - 400mA (16 steps)
mA Accuracy Indicated value ± 10%
Time Selection 10 milliseconds to 6 seconds, in 77 steps
Time Accuracy ± 10%
Regulatory Meets the requirements of 21 CFR Sub Chapter J.

1.5.3 AEC Specifications


Description Value or Range
Post Exposure Indicator Digital Readout on mAs
Film Screen Selection Six Different Film-Screen Combinations, or CR
AEC Density Control 13 Steps from 0.8 to 2.0
Fault Indicator For Backup mAs and Generator Termination
Default Termination Operator Selectable

1-8 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Description Value or Range


kV Compensation Three Calibration Points, 60, 90, 110 kV
SID Range 36 to 72 Inches (91.44 cm to 182.88 cm)
Ion Chamber/Preamplifier:
Ion Chamber Voltage: 200 VDC ± 5% Internally Generated
Input Voltage: +12 VDC, -12 VDC
Sensitivity: Film Screen Combinations 100-500
Maximum Output: 8.5 VDC
Linearity: ± 5%
Field Sizes:
Center Field: 2” x 4.4” (5.08 cm x 11.17 cm)
Left/Right: 2.2” x 3.6” (5.58 cm x 9.14 cm)

D.H.H.S. Compliance
The Anthem High Frequency x ray generator and its associated accessories
are certified components conforming to all applicable radiation performance
standards as outlined by the Food and Drug Administration, Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 21, Subchapter J, at the time of manufacture.

Regulatory Conformance
Complies with FDA radiation performance standards under 21 CFR
Subchapter J, in effect at the date of manufacture.

1.5.4 System Weight


Component Weight
Single-phase Anthem generator (including ship- 344 lb.
ping crate)
3-phase Anthem generator (including shipping 450 lb.
crate)
Upper Cabinet Power Module
1-phase 126 lb.
3-phase 86.0 lb.
HT Tank 107 lb.
Control Console 5.75 lb.
Control Console Floor Stand 24.0 lb.
Control Console Wall Mounting Bracket 1.2 lb.
3-Phase Line Match Transformer Enclosure 137 lb

1 Introduction 1-9
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.6 X-Ray Tube Compatibility Listing


This generator is compatible with the following certified X-ray tube
assemblies.
Comet
DX93H - 0.6 X 1.5
Dunlee
DU303M - 1.0 X 2.0
DU304M - 1.0 X 2.0
PX-1312 - 0.6 X 1.2
PX-1429 - 0.6 X 1.2
PX-1436 - 0.6 X 1.2
Eimac
A119 - 1.0 X 2.0
A132 - 0.6 X 1.2
A292 - 0.6 X 1.2
Philips
PG256 - 0.6 X 1.0
Toshiba
DR-3724H - 0.6 X 1.2
E7239/UX-51H39 1.0 X 2.0
E7242/UX-51H42/ 0.6 X 1.5
E7252 0.6 X 1.2 (RA stator only)
E7254 0.6 X 1.2
E7255/UX-E7255 0.6 X 1.2
Varian/Eureka
RAD-8 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-13 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-14 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-16 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-21 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-25 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-40 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-56 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-60 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-68 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-68 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-74 - 0.6 X 1.5

1.7 Identification Labels


Anthem generator component manufacturing and certification labels contain
the following information:
• The component manufacturer full name and address
• The location, month, and year of manufacture
• The component model number and serial number
The certification label also states that the component complies with either
“21CFR, Subchapter J”, or the applicable DHHS standards under the
Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 (or its equivalent).
A label may combine both manufacturing and certification information.

1-10 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1.7.1 Generator Labels


The Anthem generator identification label is located on the back of the upper
cabinet as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-7. Anthem identification label location

1.7.2 Equipment Label Symbols


The following table defines symbols typically used on component labels.

Potential hazard to operators, service personnel or equipment.

Dangerous voltage is present and accessible.

A protective earth terminal or ground.

1 Introduction 1-11
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Read and understand this manual before using this machine.


Failure to follow operating instructions can result in death or
serious injury.

IEC 60601-1 Type B classification. Type B equipment provides a


particular degree of protection against electric shock, particularly
regarding allowable leakage currents and reliability of the
protective earth connection (if present).

Dispose of this equipment according to local laws and regulations.


Because this equipment contains electronic components, dispose
of it separately from household waste. When the equipment
reaches its end of life, contact local authorities to learn about
disposal and recycling options.

The equipment emits sounds.

Alternating Current

The product contains no field serviceable parts.

Special cleaning instructions apply to the product.

The item is heavy and may pose a lift hazard.

This item is a UL Classified Device.

This item is a UL Listed Device

This item is a UL Recognized Component

This item is a CSA Listed Device

1-12 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

This item is an ETL Listed Device

This is the date of manufacture.

This identifies a product manufacturer.

This device emits laser radiation.

The product is RoHS compliant. RoHS marks can vary greatly from
one product to the next.

The product meets the requirements of applicable EC directives.

Table 1-3: Definition of symbols found on device labels.

1.8 Optional Accessories


Control Console Wall Mounting Bracket

Figure 1-8. Control Console wall mounting bracket

1 Introduction 1-13
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Control Console Floor Stand

Figure 1-9. Control Console floor stand (rear view)

Exposure Hand Switch or Optional Footswitch

1.9 Functional Description


The Anthem generator essentially conditions line voltage (single phase or 3
phase) to provide the necessary power and control to an X-ray tube for
medical radiography.
The generator provides filament current for the emission of electrons, and a
high DC voltage for acceleration of those electrons. You control these power
aspects, as well as exposure initiation and duration, from the Anthem Control
Console or from a DR workstation via the console serial port.
Power mains voltage first reaches the line match transformer(s), which
supplies the Inverter Power Supply, a three-phase full wave rectifier circuit.
The Inverter Power Supply develops approximately 400 VDC across charge-
holding capacitors.
The Main Control board communicates with the Control Console, and
governs the activity of the rest of the generator via communication with the
Power Relay board, Filament board, IPM Driver board, and Room Interface
board.

1-14 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Control of kV, mA, and Filament Preheat levels begins with analog reference
voltages, which are decoded by D/A converters on the Main Control board,
and then sent out to the kV Control Circuit, mA Control Circuit, and
Filament/Rotor control circuit.

1.9.1 Prep and Ready States


The Console sends a PREP REQUEST to the Main Control board. This tells the
Power Relay board to turn on the rotor, and also turns on the filament driver.
The Main Control board monitors the ROTOR READY and possible fault
signals. If there are no fault signals and ROTOR READY is OK, all analog
reference voltages (for kV, mA, Fill) are sent to associated circuits. On the
console, the READY light turns on and the generator is now armed for an
exposure.

1.9.2 Exposure Functions


The console sends the EXPOSE REQUEST to the Main Control board to turn
on the Main Contactor. After a 1ms delay, the Main Control board sends the
kV driver signal to the IPM Driver board to engage the Inverter. Any fault
condition present on the Main Control board inhibits or terminates the
EXPOSE Command. Any fault condition, open interlock, or STOP signal
terminates both the EXPOSE and PREP Commands.

1.9.3 kV and mA Control Functions


kV settings from the Control Console are used by the Main Control board to
provide the kV reference voltage to the kV control circuit. Based upon the
power requirements of the selected exposure technique, different parallel
configurations of the capacitors are used to vary the frequency of the high
voltage primary switching circuit, providing optimum operation for various
power output levels.
The Main Control board sends the kV drive signal to the IPM Driver board to
generate the high frequency AC input to the HT Tank.
On the Main Control board, the feedback voltages from the HT Tank are
summed, filtered, and used to adjust the pulse width per tube kV feedback or
to detect under voltage or over voltage conditions that may require an error
shutdown.
The mA or mAs settings provide the mA and Filament reference voltage to
the mA and Filament control circuit.

1.9.4 Rotor Control


The Prep signal from the console turns on a relay on the Power Relay board to
supply power to rotor. When the prep switch is pressed, a Rotor Boost signal

1 Introduction 1-15
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

is sent to Filament board to start the rotor boost. After 1.5 seconds, rotor run
pulses are sent to the Filament board to turn the rotor and maintain the speed
at 3400 RPM.

1.9.5 Interlocks
The Anthem generator has 4 interlocks that prohibit an exposure when
external devices are not ready, as indicated by closed contacts. These
interlocks are:
• door
• collimator
• wall Bucky
• table Bucky
The door and collimator interlocks cannot be overridden or disabled in the
console.

1.10 Abbreviations
AEC Automatic Exposure Control
AP Anteroposterior
APR Anatomically Programmable Radiography
AWG American Wire Gauge
BTU British Thermal Unit
CAN Controller Area Network
CDRH Center for Devices and Radiological Health
CE Communautés Européennes
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DFMTS Digital Floor Mounted Tubestand
DR Digital Radiography
ga Gauge
hPa Hecto Pascal
HT High Tension
ICRP International Commission on Radiological Protection
inHg Inches Mercury
IPM Intelligent Power Module
kN kiloNewton
kV kilovolt
kVp peak kilovoltage
kW kilowatt
LAT lateral
mA milliampere
mAs milliampere second
MeV mega-electron Volt

1-16 1 Introduction
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

NCRP National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements


NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
OBL oblique
PA posteroanterior
PBL Positive Beam Limitation
PID Patient ID
PN Patient Name
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
RAO Right Anterior Oblique
SSR Solid State Relay
UL Underwriters Laboratories

1.11 Glossary
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) — AEC uses an ionization chamber or a
solid-state detector within the Bucky to command the X-ray generator to stop
the exposure when the correct image density is reached.
AEC field — Commonly known as ionizing vector, the AEC field measures the
dose of X-ray in the interested region.
Angle of tube rotation — This is the angle of deviation from the vertical
direction when the tube rotates, and ranges from -180 to 180 degrees.
Bucky/Grid Cabinet — The component that includes a film cassette, AEC,
moving or stationary grid, and related components. In a Digital Radiology
system, the Bucky contains a Digital Radiology detector instead of a film
cassette.
Collimator — Device that regulates the size and shape of the X-ray beam to
accurately localize the area of interest on the patient, while reducing overall
patient irradiation exposure.
Free Mode — Exposing position independent of a table or wallstand.
Generator — Device that supplies power to and controls the X-ray tube.
N — Newton, the amount of the net force required to accelerate a mass of one
kilogram at a rate of one meter per second.
kVp — Peak kilo-volts, the highest energy of X-rays emitted by an X-ray tube
(equal to the peak applied tube voltage).
LAT — Lateral view position for X-ray exposure.
Longitudinal — Head-to-foot positioning of focal spot.
mAs — Milliampere-seconds. Combined with kVp, it indicates the dose of
X-rays.
OBL — Oblique view position for X-ray exposure.
Portrait Position — The long dimension parallel to the patient axis.

1 Introduction 1-17
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

SID — Source to Image Distance; the distance from the source of the X-rays to
the film or detector plane.
Table Mode — Exposing position where the patient lays on a table
Wall Mode — Exposing position where the patient stands in front of a
wallstand.
Technique Parameter — Any of the parameters describing the properties of
an X-ray beam exposure, including beam energy (kVp), beam intensity (mA),
duration (seconds), time-intensity factor (mAs), and at times, Source to Image
Distance (SID).
Transverse — Cross table (front-to-rear) travel of focal spot.

1-18 1 Introduction
2 Installation

Installation
2
2.1 Pre-Installation Planning
The Anthem generator is shipped partially assembled. Review all installation,
assembly and calibration instructions before beginning the installation. Save
all packing materials until after the installation is complete. Check that the
physical location, conduit arrangement and junction boxes are in readiness for
permanent installation of this equipment.
Before you begin installation, perform the following tasks:
• Consult with the client and/or client physical plant superintendent to
verify that the site has sufficient power, utility, and network access.
• Determine site-specific requirements, client requests, and room workflow
considerations, by reviewing the following documents, as available:
- the shipping order
- statement of work
- job orders
- client room drawings
- special written or unwritten requirements

2.1.1 X-ray Room Planning


Before installation, verify with the client and/or facility management that the
site has sufficient power, utility, networking, and infrastructure.
Determine site installation requirements and workflow using the following
documents:
 shipping orders
 statements of work
 job orders
 room planning documents, including room drawings
 special written/unwritten requirements
The room layout drawing specifies the exact location of this component.
Verify the following requirements:
 An adequate route exists to move shipping crates from the delivery
vehicle to the room, e.g., loading doc, wide-enough doorways, etc.
 Adequate and qualified staffing is available for moving and installation.

2 Installation 2-1
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

 Conduits and troughs are wide enough to accommodate all cables.


 Cables are long enough to reach destinations.
 Cables have correct connectors and gender.
 During normal workflow movements, persons or equipment in the room
do not obstruct, impinge, kink, or crush any cables.
 Cables do not interfere with or limit wallstand or tube support
movements.
 The floor condition is suitable for a plumb and secure installation
 For pre-tensioned or post tensioned concrete floors, determine the location
of the tensioned wire ropes. Consult with the customer or responsible
project engineer to locate, and avoid drilling through, the wire rope.

Caution
If the floor condition is unsuitable for a plumb and secure
installation, take corrective action with floor repair or modification.

2.1.2 Space Requirements


Figure 2-1 shows minimum floor foot print for the Anthem. Figure 2-2 shows
minimum floor foot print requirements when local regulations require the
Anthem to be anchored to the floor.
Verify that the location and space allowed are sufficient for the full range of
travels without hitting any walls, pipes or structures in the room. Verify that
the room plan is consistent with these footprint guidelines.

Note: To fully open the front of the power module, an additional 12 3/4” of space is
required in front of the generator at the height of the upper cabinet.
21 1/2”

12 3/4”

27 1/2”

Figure 2-1. Minimum foot print required without anchor brackets.

2-2 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

21 1/2”

23”
27 1/2”

31 1/2”

Figure 2-2. Minimum foot print required with anchor brackets.

Caution
Do not drill equipment mounting holes in concrete floors before
determining the location of tensioned wire ropes. Consult with
customer or responsible project engineer to locate and avoid drilling
through wire rope, which. can cause severe structural damage.

2.1.3 Power Requirements


Verify that an initial evaluation of the incoming power line has been
performed during the pre-sales site survey. This evaluation specifies the
physical configuration of the Anthem generator (i.e. Single Phase or Three
Phase line input).

Warning
Lethal voltages may be present! Never work on energized circuits
during this installation unless specifically instructed to do so.

• All wiring up to the Anthem power module input terminals must be


furnished by the customer.
• All electrical wiring must conform to state and/or local electrical codes.
Aluminum wire is unacceptable for use in wiring.

2 Installation 2-3
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.1.4 Wiring Requirements


Minimum Copper Wire Size
Dist. XFMR Min.
Model, or Distance in Feet from Distribution Point to Switch, Max. Apparent
Incoming Line Dedicated Disconnect Panel Disconnect Fuse, or Momentary Mains
Voltage, Energy to Generator Beaker Current Resis-
Phase (Φ) Source 50’ (15m) 100’ (30m) 200’ (60m) Ground (15’ max.) Rating Draw tance

30-400 50 kVA #0 #00 300mcm #6 #6 110 A 210 A 0.16 


208VAC, 1Φ 50mm2 95mm2 150mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

30-400 50 kVA #0 #00 300mcm #6 #6 100 A 180 A 0.17 


240VAC, 1Φ 50mm2 95mm2 150mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

40-500 50 kVA #0 #00 300mcm #6 #6 150 A 256 A 0.13 


208VAC, 1Φ 50mm2 95mm2 150mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

40-500 50 kVA #1 #0 #000 #6 #6 120 A 222 A 0.14 


240VAC, 1Φ 50mm2 50mm2 95mm2 16mm2 16mm2
32-500 50 kVA #4 #0 #00 #6 #6 80 A 158 A 0.11 
208VAC, 3Φ 25mm2 50mm2 95mm2 16mm2 16mm2
32-500 50 kVA #4 #0 #00 #6 #6 70 A 136 A 0.15 
240VAC, 3Φ 25mm2 50mm2 95mm2 16mm2 16mm2
32-500 50 kVA #6 #2 #0 #6 #6 50 A 86 A 0.18 
380VAC, 3Φ 16mm2 35mm2 50mm2 16mm2 16mm2
32-500 50 kVA #6 #4 #0 #6 #6 50 A 68 A 0.24 
480VAC, 3Φ 16mm2 25mm2 50mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

40-600 65 kVA #1 #0 #00 #6 #6 100 A 161 A 0.1 


208VAC, 3Φ 50mm2 50mm2 95mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

40-600 65 kVA #2 #0 #00 #6 #6 80 A 142 A 0.12 


240VAC, 3Φ 35mm2 50mm2 95mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

40-600 65 kVA #2 #1 #0 #6 #6 50 A 91 A 0.13 


380VAC, 3Φ 35mm2 50mm2 50mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

40-600 65 kVA #4 #1 #0 #6 #6 50 A 72 A 0.13 


480VAC, 3Φ 25mm2 50mm2 50mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

50-650 65 kVA #1 #0 #00 #6 #6 100 A 200 A 0.10 


208VAC, 3Φ 50mm2 50mm2 95mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

50-650 65 kVA #2 #0 #00 #6 #6 90 A 176 A 0.13 


240VAC, 3Φ 35mm2 50mm2 95mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

50-650 65 kVA #2 #1 #0 #6 #6 60 A 110 A 0.16 


380VAC, 3Φ 35mm2 50mm2 50mm2 16mm 16mm2
2

50-650 65 kVA #4 #1 #0 #6 #6 50 A 88 A 0.17 


480VAC, 3Φ 25mm2 50mm2 50mm2 16mm2 16mm2
Table 2-1: Power wiring and fusing requirements

Note: The minimum wire sizes listed above have been selected for the maximum wire
resistance allowed at maximum momentary full load current. To meet National
Electric Code Specifications, select a fuse or circuit breaker with an amperage rating of
at least 50% of the generator’s peak current demand.

2-4 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Caution
Attempts to attach accessory items other than those described in this manual
may damage circuitry. Do not use aluminum wire. All wiring MUST be
copper.

Warning
These instructions are intended for use by qualified installers only.

2.1.5 Shipment Contents


Your shipment will arrive in a box on a shipping pallet. The box contains the
upper and lower cabinet and the operator control console (packed inside the
lower cabinet). Save the boxes until the generator is inspected for shipping
damage, installed, and operational.
Ensure that the configuration is accurate and that the correct parts have been
received.
Attention: Upon receipt, inspect all crates and cartons for exterior damage
during transportation. If any damage is evident, immediately inspect for
concealed damage to component parts. If there is concealed damage, file a
claim with the transportation company immediately.

2.1.6 Unpacking
1. Move the pallet to the approximate position where generator will be
installed.
2. Cut the plastic straps. Remove the straps and the top cover.
3. Lift off the outer box shell.
4. Remove shrink wrapping from around the generator.
5. Slightly tilt the generator and gently “walk” the generator off of the pallet
onto the floor at its final location.

2 Installation 2-5
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.1.7 In-Table Installation


The Anthem can be installed inside an RT100 table. This configuration does
not use a lower cabinet enclosure. See Figure 2-3 for component orientation.

Power Module

HT Tank

Figure 2-3. In-table component orientation

For 3-phase systems, install the line match transformer enclosure outside the
table within about 8 feet.
Input power connections (“Power Connections” on page 2-9) are made at the
rear of the Power Module. Make these connections before sliding the Power
Module into the table.

2.1.8 Installation Tools Required:


• Adjustable-end wrench
• Medium Phillips screwdriver
• Pallet hoist
• Power drill and masonry bit (size determined by installer)
• Set of nut drivers
• Small flat-tip screwdriver
• Standard tool kit for installing X-ray systems
• True RMS volt/multimeter

2-6 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2 Installation
Before starting the installation, study the “External Cables” section to become
familiar with Anthem connections to other equipment, and to verify that you
have all the required cables. Connections to specific Anthem connectors and
terminal blocks are identified in the installation procedures that follow.
Observe wire size and grounding requirements per local codes.

2.2.1 External Cables

4 Aux 24Vdc/24Vac
5 In-Use Lamp
Power
Module 6 Room Interlock

Wallstand
Tube

Collimator

Ion Chamber
Receptor
12

Bucky
Power Mains
(1-Phase) 1
7

10
11
8

10 Ion Chamber
11 Receptor Table
9 Bucky

20
DR Sync Box

DR
2 3 13 14 15 Workstation
19
17
Power Mains Line Match
(3-Phase) 1 Transformers and HT Tank 16 18
Terminal Blocks
(3-Phase)
Handswitch/
Lower Cabinet Console Footswitch

Figure 2-4. External cable identification

2 Installation 2-7
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Cable # Description Length Part #


1 Main Power (1-phase) 15 ft (4.6 m) 126-5317G1
Main Power (3-phase) 15 ft (4.6 m) 126-5318G1
2 High Power Line Match to Power 4 ft (1.2 m) 126-5291G1
Module (3-phase)
3 Low Power Line Match to Power 7 ft (2.1 m) 126-5292G1
Module (3-phase) 12 ft (3.6 m) 126-5292G2 (In-table)
4 24 VAC Auxiliary Power. (not included with Anthem)
5 Room-In-Use Lamp/Sign (not included with Anthem)
Closing Contacts
6 Room Interlock (not included with Anthem)
7 Collimator Interlock (not included with Anthem)
8 Wall Bucky 20 ft (6.1 m) 5500-2399 (3546E)
63 ft (19.2 m) 126-5050G4 (VS300)
65 ft (19.8 m) 126-5089G1 (VS300,
VT300)
9 Table Bucky 20 ft (6.1 m) 5500-2399 (RT100)
65 ft (19.8 m) 126-5050G3 (EV800)
10 Wall and Table Ion Chamber 45 ft (13.7 m) 75035-45 (supplied
with ion chamber)
11 Wall/Table Receptor Select/Rdy (not included with Anthem)
12 Tube Stator (not included with Anthem,
126-5502G1 typical)
13 kV/mA Feedback 8 ft (2.4 m) 126-0177G2
14 HV Primary 3 ft (0.9 m) 126-5290G1
15 Filament 6 ft (1.8 m) 126-5294G1
16 High Tension (2) 15 ft (4.6 m) K-3375-15
20 ft (6.1 m) K-3375-20
25 ft (7.6 m) K-3375-25
30 ft (9.1 m) K-3375-30
35 ft (10.7 m) K-3375-35
40 ft (12.2 m) K-3375-40
50 ft (15.2 m) K-3375-50
60 ft (18.3 m) K-3375-60
17 Console Communication 45 ft (13.7 m) 126-5174G1
18 Handswitch w/Cable Coiled 120-5017G1
Footswitch w/Cable 20 ft (6.1 m) 122-0117G3
19 Console to DR Workstation, DB9 (not included with Anthem)
20 DR Sync Box (DelWorks) (not included with Anthem)
Note: Some cables listed are already connected upon delivery.
Table 2-2. External and inter-cabinet cable identification

2-8 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2.2 Power Connections


The Anthem generator requires a dedicated power line.

Warning
Make sure that the power to the main power cable is turned off.

Single Phase Generators


Single-phase generators require a nominal 240 VAC voltage, individually
fused, typically wired from a disconnect or a breaker box.
1. Confirm that, according to Table 2-1 on page 2-4, facility wiring and
fusing are correct for the Anthem model being installed.
2. Ensure that the power to the main power cable is turned off.
3. Connect the main power cable (126-5317G1) to the disconnect as follows:
• Green to ground
• White to Line 1
• Black to Line 2
• Leave the neutral feed unconnected
4. Route the main power cable (126-5317G1) to the generator location.
5. Remove the rear panel of the power module (upper cabinet). Retain all
hardware.
6. Locate the power module ground terminal (Figure 2-5). Remove and
retain the ground nut and temporarily disconnect the ground wires.
Ground Terminal

Route Main
Power Cable
Through This
Clamp

Figure 2-5. Terminal TB1 and ground terminal on rear of power module

2 Installation 2-9
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

7. Route the main power cable (126-5317G1) through the center cable clamp
(Figure 2-5). Rotate the cable so that the ground wire runs flat along the
power module panel.
8. Connect the green ground wire from the main power cable to the ground
terminal (Figure 2-6), and reconnect the other previously disconnected
ground wires to the ground terminal. Secure the ground wires with the
nut.
Line 1
(White)

Ground
(Green)

Line 2
(Black)

Figure 2-6. Main power connections

9. Connect the main power cable white wire (Line 1) to the 0 VOLTS terminal.
10. Connect the main power cable black wire (Line 2) to the matching 208 or
240 Volt terminal. Refer to Table 2-3 for correct voltage connections.

208-220 VAC, or
TB1 nominal 220 VAC 230-240 VAC
1 (0 VOLTS) Line 1 Line 1
2 (208 VOLTS) Line 2 -
3 (240 VOLTS) - Line 2
4 (290 VOLTS) - -
5 (P1) - -
6 (P2) - -
Table 2-3. Incoming single phase main power TB1 connection
11. Tighten the main power cable clamp.
12. Reinstall the rear panel.

3-Phase Generators
1. Ensure that the power to the main power cable is turned off.
2. Route the main power cable (126-5318G1) to the generator location.

2-10 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. On the lower cabinet, remove the 4 front panel mounting screws


(Figure 2-7) and remove the front panel.

Figure 2-7. Front panel screw locations

4. Feed the main power cable (126-5318G1) to through the cable clamp and
hole on the back of the lower cabinet. See Figure 2-8.

Cable Clamp

Figure 2-8. Main power cable routed through the back of the generator.

5. Connect the main power cable’s green/yellow ground wire to the ground
stud on the bottom of the lower cabinet (Figure 2-9). There are two nuts on
the ground bolt. If there are 3 or more ground wires, separate them
between nuts.

2 Installation 2-11
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

TB1, TB2,
and TB3

Ground Wire Ground Stud

Figure 2-9. Ground stud at the bottom of the lower cabinet

2-12 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

6. Verify the incoming line voltage. (Line voltage is rated/measured phase-


to-phase, not phase-to-ground.) This will determine the correct terminals
to use on TB1, TB2, and TB3.

Note: For 220 VAC, use the 208V terminal. For 230 VAC, use the 240V terminal.

7. Connect the 126-5318G1 main power cable as follows. See Figure 2-10.

Color Connector
green/yellow ground stud on base plate
black TB1, voltage verified in step 6
white TB2, voltage verified in step 6
red TB3, voltage verified in step 6

TB1 TB2 TB3

Figure 2-10. Connection of incoming lines, 280 VAC example

In-Table 3-Phase Generator


When installing a 3-phase-powered Anthem inside a table, such as the Del
Medical RT100, you must install the line match transformers outside the table.
In this application, the line match transformers and their associated terminal
blocks reside in a separate dedicated enclosure.
1. Ensure that the power to the main power cable is turned off.
2. Place the line match transformer enclosure at its installation location.

2 Installation 2-13
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. At the rear of the power module, locate the 2 power cables that are coiled
and cable-tied to the rear panel:
• 126-5291G2 (thicker, black)
• 126-5292G2 (thinner, gray)
Cut the cable tie, uncoil the cables, and route them to the line match
transformer enclosure location.
4. On the line match transformer enclosure, remove the 4 cover mounting
screws (Figure 2-11), and remove the cover.

Cover Mounting
Screws (4)

Power Mains In
To Power Module

Figure 2-11. 3-phase line match transformer enclosure

5. At the line match transformer enclosure, feed both cables through the
right-side (as viewed from the outside) cable clamp and hole, and into the
enclosure.
6. Connect the 126-5291G2 (thicker, black) cable as follows:

Color Connector
green/yellow ground stud on base plate
black TB1-280
white or tan TB2-280
red TB3-280

7. Connect the 126-5292G2 (thinner, gray) cable as follows:

Label Connector
GND STUD (green/yellow) ground stud on base plate
LM 240V TB2-3 (across from TB2-240)
LM 240V RTN TB3-3 (across from TB3-240)
TMSW-1 TB1-TSW1
TMSW-2 TB3-TSW2

2-14 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Mains
Power In

Ground Stud

Figure 2-12. 3-phase line match transformer separate enclosure; view from top
with cover removed

8. Verify the incoming line voltage. (Line voltage is rated/measured phase-


to-phase, not phase-to-ground.) This will determine the correct terminals
to use on TB1, TB2, and TB3.

Note: For 220 VAC, use the 208V terminal. For 230 VAC, use the 240V terminal.

9. Route the main power cable (126-5318G2) to the line match transformer
enclosure location.
10. Feed the main power cable to the line match transformer enclosure and
through the left cable clamp and hole on the back of the enclosure.
11. Connect the 126-5318G2 main power cable as follows:

Color Connector
green/yellow ground stud on base plate
black TB1, voltage verified in step 10 on page 2-10
white TB2, voltage verified in step 10 on page 2-10
red TB3, voltage verified in step 10 on page 2-10

12. Tighten both cable clamps.


13. Reinstall the line match transformer enclosure cover.

2 Installation 2-15
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2.3 Connecting Components to the Generator


Important: You must connect all interlock devices or use bypass jumpers. Failure
to do this will inhibit any exposures.

Component Cable Routing


To prepare for component connections, perform the following steps:
1. Remove eight upper cabinet cover screws (two in front and three on each
side) and lift off cover (see Figure 2-13).
Lift Cover Up
and Off

Side Screws

Front Screws

Figure 2-13. Removal of upper cabinet cover

2. At the side of the power module, route the cables from the tube and image
receptor(s) through the cable routing bracket holes (Figure 2-14).

Cable Routing Bracket

Figure 2-14. Cable routing through the power module’s cable routing bracket

2-16 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. At the front of the power module, route the cables through the cable
clamps (Figure 2-15).

Cable Clamps

Figure 2-15. Cable routing through the power module’s front cable clamps

4. Connect the following cables to the Room Interface board per Table 2-4.

Component Terminal Block See Section


wall Bucky TB4 “Wallstand Bucky Connections” on
page 2-19
table Bucky TB5 “Table Bucky Connections” on
page 2-21
tube rotor TB3 “Tube Rotor Connections” on
page 2-22
collimator 24 VAC TB6 “Collimator Power Connections (If
power Required)” on page 2-23
table/wallstand locks TB6 “Table/Wallstand Lock and Other DC
and other 24VDC con- Connections” on page 2-24
nections
collimator interlock TB1 “Collimator Interlock and Door Inter-
and door interlock lock Connections” on page 2-24
digital imaging recep- TB2 & TB8 “Digital Imaging Receptor Connec-
tors tions” on page 2-25
room-in-use indicator TB1 “Room-In-Use Indicator Light Con-
light nection” on page 2-28
Table 2-4: Room interface board connections summary

2 Installation 2-17
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

TB1

TB6

TB3

TB4

TB5

TB2 TB8

Figure 2-16. Room Interface board terminal block locations

Warning
Be sure to connect ground cables to the ground screw above the board
(Figure 2-17).

Do not connect any loads to this supply that require more than 4A.
Heavier loads can damage the power supply.

2-18 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Ground Connection

Figure 2-17. Component connections to ground at Room Interface board

2.2.4 Wallstand Bucky Connections


For a wallstand equipped with a Bucky cabinet, remove the jumper between
TB4-2 and TB4-4 and connect the cable to terminal block TB4 on the Room
Interface board as shown in Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-18. Wall Bucky connections to terminal block TB4

Anthem Signal Designation Del Medi-


Terminal Del Progeny Progeny Villa cal cable
Block Medical LF 8000 LF 8000 (see note Wire
Connection Signal RB100 LF 9000 (earlier) below) Colors
TB4-1 Bucky Start (117 VAC) 3 3 B3 7 Red
TB4-2 Expose Start (BK RDY) 2 2 B2 12 Black
TB4-3 117 VAC Power L L B8 3 Blue
TB4-4 Expose Start Return 1 1 B1 11 Brown
TB4-5 117 VAC Return N N B4 1 White
Chassis GND Chassis GND GND GND GND GND Grn/Yel
Table 2-5: Wall Bucky connections to the Room Interface board

2 Installation 2-19
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Note: For the Villa Bucky, 120 VAC operation, install a jumper between terminals 1
and 6 at the Bucky.

Note: If the wallstand is not equipped with a Bucky, see “Wallstand Grid
Cabinet Connections” below.

2.2.5 Wallstand Grid Cabinet Connections


If the wallstand is equipped with a grid cabinet, ensure that an interlock
jumper (126-5572) is connected to terminal block TB4 on the Room Interface
board as shown in Figure 2-19.
If not already installed, install the jumper between TB4-2 and TB4-4. This
jumper satisfies the Bucky interlock circuit, and if not connected, generates a
Bucky error.

Figure 2-19. Wallstand grid cabinet jumper on terminal block TB4

2-20 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2.6 Table Bucky Connections


For a table equipped with a Bucky cabinet:
1. Remove the jumper between TB5-2 and TB5-4 (if present).
2. Connect the table Bucky cable to terminal block TB5 on the Room Interface
board (cable part 5500-2399) as shown in Figure 2-20.

Figure 2-20. Table Bucky connections to terminal block TB5.

Anthem Signal Designation Del Medi-


Terminal Del Progeny Progeny Villa cal cable
Block Medical LF 8000 LF 8000 (see note Wire
Connection Signal RB100 LF 9000 (earlier) below) Colors
TB5-1 Bucky Start (117 VAC) 3 3 B3 7 Red
TB5-2 Expose Start (BK RDY) 2 2 B2 12 Black
TB5-3 117 VAC Power L L B8 3 Blue
TB5-4 Expose Start Return 1 1 B1 11 Brown
TB5-5 117 VAC Return N N B4 1 White
Chassis GND Chassis GND GND GND GND GND Grn/Yel
Table 2-6: Table Bucky connections to the Room Interface board

Note: For the Villa Bucky, 120 VAC operation, install a jumper between terminals 1
and 6 at the Bucky.

Note: If the table is not equipped with a Bucky, see “Table Grid Cabinet
Connections” on page 2-22.

2 Installation 2-21
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2.7 Table Grid Cabinet Connections


If the table is equipped with a grid cabinet, ensure that an interlock jumper is
connected to terminal block TB5 on the Room Interface board as shown in
Figure 2-21.
If not already installed, install the jumper between TB5-2 and TB5-4. This
jumper satisfies the Bucky interlock circuit, and if not connected, generates a
Bucky error.

Figure 2-21. Table grid cabinet jumper on terminal block TB5

2.2.8 Tube Rotor Connections


Connect the tube rotor cable to terminal block TB3 on the Room Interface
board as shown in Figure 2-22.

Figure 2-22. Tube rotor connections to terminal block TB3 (colors may vary)

Connection Signal
TB3-1 PHASE Stator Phase or AUX
TB3-2 MAIN Stator Main
TB3-3 COMMON Stator Common
TB3-4 THERMAL SW2 Thermal Switch *
TB3-5 THERMAL SW1 Thermal Switch Common *

*An isolated, normally closed (NC) set of contacts, mounted on the tube
housing, which opens if the housing exceeds normal operating temperatures.
If no housing thermal switch is present, install a jumper across TB3-4 and
TB3-5.

2-22 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Alternate Method for Determining Tube Stator Connections


If you are not sure of an X-ray tube’s stator leads (don’t go by the colors),
use an Ohm meter and follow these steps:
1. Measure the resistance between all wires; e.g. for 3 stator wires, a-b, a-c,
a-c.
2. Find the two wires with the highest resistance (about 80 Ω). Label the
remaining wire as COMMON.
3. Measure the resistance between the COMMON wire and the other two
wires. Label the wire with the higher resistance (about 50-60 Ω) as
PHASE.
4. Label the remaining wire (resistance to COMMON about 20-30 Ω) as
MAIN.

2.2.9 Collimator Power Connections (If Required)


Connect the collimator 24 VAC power cable to terminal block TB6 on the
Room Interface board as shown in Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23. Collimator 24 V power supply connection.

Connection Signal
TB6-1 24 VAC return
TB6-2 24 VAC
Ground Green/Yellow
Table 2-7. Collimator power supply connections.

2 Installation 2-23
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2.10 Table/Wallstand Lock and Other DC Connections


Connect the table or wallstand lock (or other 24 VDC load) power cable to
terminal block TB6 on the Room Interface board as shown in Figure 2-24. Do
not exceed the maximum load capacity of 4 A.

Figure 2-24. Table/wallstand lock 24 VDC power supply connections

Connection Signal
TB6-3 Marked +24
TB6-4 Marked -24
Ground Green/Yellow
Table 2-8. Table/wallstand lock 24 VDC power supply connections

2.2.11 Collimator Interlock and Door Interlock Connections


You must make connections regardless of whether you use a door interlock or
not.

When not using a Collimator Interlock or Door Interlock


If you are not connecting collimator interlock or door open interlock any of
these, you must install jumpers on terminal block TB1 on the Room Interface
board as shown below. If only one of the interlocks is connected, set the
jumper for the one not used.

Note: If the required jumpers are not installed, exposures are inhibited.

Connect the collimator interlock and/or door open interlock to terminal block
TB1 on the Room Interface board as shown in Figure 2-25.

2-24 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

J2 J1

Figure 2-25. Jumper settings for system with no collimator interlock and/or door open
interlocks.

Jumper Between terminals


J1 (no collimator interlock) TB1-1 and TB1-2
J2 (no door interlock) TB1-1 and TB1-3
Table 2-9. Jumper settings, no collimator interlock and/or door open interlocks

When using a Collimator Interlock and/or Door Interlock


Connect the collimator interlock cable wires to terminals TB1-1 and TB1-2 on
the Room Interface board (Figure 2-26).

TB1-3 TB1-2 TB1-1


Door Interlock Collimator Interlock Common
Figure 2-26. Collimator and door interlock cable connections to TB1

Connect the door interlock cable to terminals TB1-1 and TB1-3 on the Room
Interface board (Figure 2-26). At the other end, a switch closes when the door
closes.

2.2.12 Digital Imaging Receptor Connections


You can make connections for DR system receptors for the following signals:
• Table & Wall Ready
• Table and Wall Exposure Request
• Prep

2 Installation 2-25
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Connect digital imaging receptors to terminal blocks TB2 and TB8 on the
Room Interface board as shown in Figure 2-27.

TB2 TB8
Figure 2-27. DR ready and exposure signal connections

Connection Signal
TB2-1 TABLE READY +
TB2-2 TABLE READY -
TB2-3 WALL READY +
TB2-4 WALL READY -
TB8-1 WALL EXPOSURE REQUEST +
TB8-2 WALL EXPOSURE REQUEST -
TB8-3 TABLE EXPOSURE REQUEST +
TB8-4 TABLE EXPOSURE REQUEST -
TB8-5 PREP +
TB8-6 PREP -
Table 2-10. DR Ready and Exposure signal connections

Example DR Single Detector Connection


A possible DR configuration might involve a single-detector DR system with a
DelWorks synchronization device (sync box), as shown in Figure 2-28. This

2-26 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

example addresses the DR workstation connection to the Anthem Control


Console, and the sync box connection to the Anthem Room Interface board.

DR
Anthem detector
generator

room interface
sync box

DB9
Control
Console
DR workstation

Figure 2-28. Anthem generator single-detector DR system connection

DR Workstation Connection. The Control Console communicates with the


DR workstation via its DB9 serial port. If the DR workstation requires a USB
connection, then use a USB-to-DB9 active-circuit adapter cable, (Digi-Key part
number 768-1013-ND or equivalent).
DR Sync Box Connection. The DelWorks sync box kit includes a cable with
wires marked as shown in Table 2-11. This example uses a connection to the
Anthem table signals.

Anthem Room Interface Sync Box Cable Label


TB2-1 TABLE RDY+ RLS_1
TB2-2 TABLE RDY- RLS_2
TB8-3 TABLE EXP REQ+ XPB1 +
TB8-4 TABLE EXP REQ- XPB1 -
TB8-5 PREP+ PREP +
TB8-6 PREP- PREP -
Table 2-11. Room Interface to sync box cable connections
Room Interface Jumpers for Single Detector. This example DR system uses a
single detector, but may be using that detector in both wall and table
applications. Thus, to enable DR exposures in both situations, add jumpers to
the Room Interface board as follows:
• from TB4-1 (wall select) to TB5-1 (table select)
• from TB4-2 (wall ready) to TB5-2 (table ready)
Note: If making connections described in this section to TB2 and TB8, remove any
jumpers from TB4 and TB5.

2 Installation 2-27
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2.13 Room-In-Use Indicator Light Connection


You can connect a room-in-use light that indicates when the system is making
an X-ray exposure. The Anthem generator closes the circuit when the prep
button is pressed, and opens the circuit when the exposure sequence ends or
aborts. The Anthem generator does not provide lamp power; you must use an
external power source.
Figure 2-29 shows one possible room-in-use light circuit to connect to TB1-6
and TB1-7 on the Room Interface board.

Preferred Method
TB1-6

15 A
24 VAC 120 VAC

TB1-7

Anthem Customer
Contactor X-Ray Warning
Room Supplied,
Light
Interface Not Included
Board With Anthem

Alternate Method
TB1-6

VAC or VDC

TB1-7 X-Ray Warning


Light
Anthem Customer
Room Supplied,
Interface Not Included
Board With Anthem

Figure 2-29. Room-In-Use indication light circuit diagram

Note: Always refer to local electrical codes for correct wiring methods.

2-28 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.2.14 Control Console Connection


The Operator Control Console communication cable is bundled up at the rear
of the top cabinet.
1. Unwind the Control Console communication cable (126-5174G1) and
footswitch (122-0117G3) or handswitch (120-5017), and route these to
where the Control Console is to be located.
2. Connect the communication cable connector to the Control Console
connector J5 as shown on the lefthand side in Figure 2-30. Tighten the
cable strain relief bracket enough to prevent the cable from sliding
through it. Do not over-tighten.

Foot/Hand
Communication Switch Cable
Cable Connector J5 Connector J11

Ground
Connections
Strain Relief Brackets
Figure 2-30. Communication and footswitch/handswitch cable connection

3. Connect the footswitch or handswitch cable connector to the Control


Console connector J11 as shown on the righthand side in Figure 2-30.
4. Connect the communication cable ground wire to the left terminal of the
right side bracket, and tighten the cable strain relief bracket just enough to
prevent the cable from sliding through it.

2.2.15 High Tension (HT) Cable Connections


To connect the HT cables, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the HT cables from their box.
2. Route the cables through the upper right opening on the back of the lower
cabinet on the generator. While routing, ensure that the cables provide
sufficient slack.

2 Installation 2-29
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. Remove the protective sheathing from the ends of the HT cables.


4. Slide the threaded ring (Figure 2-31) onto the end of each cable.

O-Ring Flange Threaded Ring

Figure 2-31. HT cable preparation

5. Slide the flange on the cable end as shown.


6. Slide the O-ring onto the cable end as shown.
7. Thoroughly coat the entire plug shaft and between the contact pins with
the anti-moisture silicone paste included in the cable box.

Caution
Failure to apply silicone paste can cause tube damage due to arcing.

8. Remove the protective plugs from the high-tension cable sockets in the
X-ray tube.
9. Important. Ensure the set screw on the threaded ring (Figure 2-32) is
backed out several turns so that it does not interfere with the tightening of
the cable or cause damage.

2-30 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10. Connect the HT cable connectors to the tube sockets. Tighten the ring
firmly by hand.

Set Screw

Figure 2-32. HT cable ring set screw

Caution
Connecting a high tension cable from the X-ray tube to the wrong
socket on the generator will destroy the tube. The cables marked “+”
must go to the socket marked “+”, and the cable marked “-” must go to
the socket marked “-.”

11. Remove the protective plugs from the HT Tank inside the generator.

Note: Ensure electrical insulating oil or vapor-proofing compound is used in the HT


receptacles. You must use insulating oil within the receptacles of the HT Tank.

12. Connect the HT cable going to the cathode (-) socket on the tube to the
CATHODE (-) socket on the HT Tank (Figure 2-33).

Figure 2-33. Cathode HT cable to HT Tank.

2 Installation 2-31
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

13. Connect the HT cable going to the anode (+) socket on the tube to the
ANODE (+) socket on the HT Tank.
14. Tighten the rings (Figure 2-34) to secure the connections.

Rings

Figure 2-34. HT cables connected to HT Tank.

Caution
Connecting an HT cable to the wrong socket on the generator will
destroy the tube. Verify that cathode (-) on the generator connects to
cathode (-) on tube and that anode (+) on the generator connects to
anode (+) on tube.

2.3 Initial Testing and Configuration


This procedure verifies correct electrical operation and leads you through the
generator calibration. This procedure is not intended to limit the service
engineer's final assembly inspections. At the discretion of the engineer,
additional testing may be of value. Instructions and test criteria can be
obtained by contacting our technical support group. This procedure assures
that mechanical and electrical assemblies of the generator have been
completed. Further, this procedure requires that the default system
configuration setup of the controller has already been programmed.

Warning
Lethal voltages are present on the DC bus capacitors in this unit.
Exercise extreme caution when working near the long copper bus bars
attached to the two large capacitors in the base of the power module.
Always verify with a DC voltmeter that the capacitors are discharged
before attempting any service in this area.

2-32 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
The large commutating capacitors mounted to the right on the rear
panel of the power module remain charged even when the power to
the unit is turned off.

2.3.1 Test Equipment Required


• Digital Multimeter

2.3.2 Inspection of the HT Tank


1. Turn Mains Power OFF
2. Visually inspect the HT Tank for signs of oil leaks or dents that could
decrease internal component spacing
3. At the transformer oil level window (Figure 2-35), check the oil level in the
transformer. Oil is at the proper level when it reaches the horizontal level
pin in the window.

Oil Level
Window

Figure 2-35. Oil level inspection window

4. Check for loose connections at the transformer terminals


5. Check tightness of HT cable locking rings

2.3.3 Inspection of Power Module


1. Turn Mains Power OFF
2. Check that circuit boards are securely fastened in place and that board
connectors are properly aligned
3. Check that all electrical components are mounted securely

2 Installation 2-33
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Inspect electrical connections for signs of looseness or oxidation. Pay


careful attention to power and commutating capacitors as well as
incoming power supply connections

2.3.4 Inspection of Control Console


1. Ensure the console cable is securely connected to the console board at J5.
Ensure that the strain relief cable clamp is secure.
2. Ensure the console cable ground wire is connected to the console’s metal
rear plate (Figure 2-30 on page 2-29).
3. Visually inspect the front panel for gouges, dents, or scratches, which
would indicate damage to the internal layers of the panel.
4. Check that all electrical components are mounted securely
5. Inspect electrical connections for signs of looseness or oxidation

2-34 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2.3.5 Board and Test Point Locations


The operational test instructions in this chapter refer to specific test points on
the different boards on the generator. The boards and test points are shown in
Figure 2-36 to Figure 2-40.

Room Interface Board

IPM Driver Board

Power Relay Board

Main Control Board

Filament Board
Figure 2-36. Board locations

2 Installation 2-35
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

TP1 - TP3

TP4 - TP10

Figure 2-37. Test points on the Filament board

2-36 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

TP10 TP11 TP10B

TP2
TP3

TP7
TP8
TP9

TP1 TP6
TP4
TP5

Figure 2-38. Test points on the Power Relay board

2 Installation 2-37
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

TP4, TP5, TP5A

TP1 - TP3 TP24 - TP26


TP6 - TP13

TP6A
TP22A

TP20 - TP22
TP47 - TP52
TP22B
TP47A
TP305
TP306
TP15 - TP17
TP23

TP53 - TP55

TP300
TP18, TP19 TP301
TP304

TP38 - TP42
TP31 - TP37

TP22C

TP26A TP302

TP43 - TP46 TP303

Figure 2-39. Test points on the Main Control board

2-38 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

TP15, TP14, TP9, TP12,


TP16 TP13 TP10 TP11

TP5, TP6, TP3, TP4, TP1,


TP6B, TP6A TP7, TP8 TP2

Figure 2-40. Test points on the IPM Driver board

Verify board functionality as follows:


1. Turn the mains power disconnect switch ON. Do not turn on the control
console on at this time. (Note: On the Power Relay board, LED1 - LED4
turn on.)
2. On the Power Relay board, measure 240 VAC at TB7-5 and TB7-6.
3. Press the ON switch on the side of the control console. Verify the
following actions:
a. The console performs a self test, then boots to a default screen.
b. Connect the negative lead of a voltmeter to the ground test point (TP1)
on the Power Relay board. Check for the following voltages on the
Power Relay board:
- TP4 = -15 VDC ± 5%
- TP5 = +12 VDC ± 5%
4. Verify voltage on Power Relay board:
Voltage between TP2 and TP3 is 9V ± 3% (TP3 is COM)
Voltage between TP1 and TP5 is +12V ± 3% (TP1 is COM)

2 Installation 2-39
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Voltage between TP1 and TP4 is -15V ± 3% (TP1 is COM)


Voltage between TP7 and TP8 is +50V ± 10% (TP8 is COM)
Voltage between TP9 and TP8 is -50V ± 10% (TP8 is COM)
5. Connect the negative lead of a voltmeter to the test point (TP9) on the
Filament board. Check voltages on the Filament board at TP10 = +12VDC
± 5%
6. Connect the negative lead of a voltmeter to the ground test point (TP1) on
the Filament board. Check for the following voltages on the Filament
board:
- TP2: +50V ± 10%
- TP3: -50V ± 10%
7. Connect the negative lead of a voltmeter to the ground test point (TP1).
Verify voltage on the Main Control board, TP22 is COM
Voltage between TP20 and TP22 is -12V ± 3%
Voltage between TP25 and TP22 is +5V ± 3%
Voltage between TP26 and TP22 is +3.3V ± 3%
Voltage between TP24 and TP22 is +3.1V ± 3%
Voltage between TP305 and TP22C is -12V ± 3%
Voltage between TP306 and TP22C is -12V ± 3%
8. Verify voltage on the IPM Driver board:
Voltage between TP9 and TP10 is 15V ± 3% (TP10 is COM).
Voltage between TP11 and TP12 is 15V ± 3% (TP12 is COM).
Voltage between TP13 and TP14 is 15V ± 3% (TP14 is COM).
Voltage between TP15 and TP16 is 15V ± 3% (TP16 is COM).

2.3.6 Verify the Door Interlock Safety Function


If you are using a door interlock switch, perform the following steps:
1. While the generator is on, open the door.
2. Confirm that the control console displays DOOR OPEN.

If the control console does not display DOOR OPEN, check the following:
- at the Room Interface board, the interlock connections
- at the door, the switch wiring
3. While DOOR OPEN is still displayed, press the prep button. Verify that the
green READY light does not turn on. If the READY light does turn on,
contact Technical Support.

2.3.7 The Service Mode Menu


During installation, you use the Control Console Service Mode menus to set
options, configure the system, and perform calibration.

2-40 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Caution
Write down your password and store it in a safe place. If you forget
your password, you must send the Control Console back to the factory
for reprogramming.

Entering Service Mode


To enter Service Mode, perform the following steps:
1. Press and hold the second-from-left bottom-row multifunction button
(Figure 2-41). While pressing the button, turn on the console’s power
switch.

Power
Switch

Hold While Turning


On Power Switch
Figure 2-41. Entering Service Mode

When the Control Console boots up, you are prompted for a password. It
shows the default password of 0000.

2 Installation 2-41
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1 2

3
Figure 2-42. Service Mode password

2. With 0000 displayed, press OK.


If your password is not 0000, use the top-row multifunction buttons and
the data knob to select the correct password digits, then press OK.
The Service Mode Menu appears.

Service Mode Menu Options

Figure 2-43. Service Mode menu

2-42 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

The Service Mode menu contains the following menu options:


• ALLOW APR UPDATES. (YES or NO) Allow users to modify and save edited
technique parameters. While in User Mode, if you change any technique
parameters, you see SAVE TECHNIQUE.
• POWER % LEVEL. (50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% or 100%). Set kW level as a
percentage of the maximum power of your Anthem generator. The factory
default is 100%. If your power line cannot easily support the full power
consumption rate of your Anthem generator, reduce this value to derate
the generator’s output power.
In 2-point mode, derating the generator reduces the mA output during
exposure, causing longer exposure times. kV is not affected.
In 3-point mode, derating lowers the allowable kilowatt product, which
limits your available technique selections.
• AEC INSTALLED. (YES or NO). Enable AEC options on the operator menus.
• CALIBRATE. Use the following menu sub-options to calibrate mA, kV, pre-
heat, and AEC settings.
- IMPORT CAL PTS. (YES or NO). Load all calibration data from an SD card.
- EXPORT CAL PTS. (YES or NO). Save all calibration data to an SD card.
- BURN FAC DFTS. (YES or NO). Revert all calibration settings to their
factory default values. This selection also resets the flash memory and
clears flash memory fault messages. This selection does not affect APR
user settings.
- DISCHARGE CAPS. (YES or NO). Discharge the DC bus capacitors. Before
servicing circuits in the upper cabinet, see “Discharge Procedure” on
page 6-2.
• WALL BUCKY/TABLE BUCKY. (Yes or No). Determine which work stations
are available in User Mode.
Note: If you are not using a reciprocating grid or grid cabinets, you must install
a jumper on the Room Interface board TB5. See “Wallstand Bucky Connections”
on page 2-19 or “Table Bucky Connections” on page 2-21.
• TUBE SELECT. Select from tubes available in the Anthem generator’s
library. Select this option, then use the data knob to scroll through tube
selections. See “X-Ray Tube Alternatives” on page 2-44 for available
alternatives.
• FLASH OPTIONS. Manage and update the APR database. This option is not
displayed if your Anthem generator has the DR option enabled. Select this and
you see the following options:
- EXPORT APR. (YES or NO). Save the APR database (user settings) to an
SD card.
- IMPORT APR. (YES or NO). Load an APR database (user settings) from an
SD card.
- DFLT APR DATA. (MED or VET). Set the APR regions and view names to
reflect either a medical or veterinarian nomenclature.
- RESET APR VALUES. (YES or NO). Revert all APR user settings to factory
default values. This command overwrites all APR user settings.

2 Installation 2-43
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

- LAPTOP TRANSFER. (YES or NO). Transfer the APR database to a


computer. see “Managing the APR Database” on page 3-10.
• MISC OPTIONS. Go to KEY OPTIONS, ERROR LOG, TROUBLESHOOT, DEMO
MODE, and BUCKY START.
- KEY OPTIONS. Use this selection to upgrade feature options or change
the console power level (model).
- ERROR LOG. (YES or NO). When saving APR data to an SD card and this
option is set to Yes, also export an error log file in CSV (comma
separated variable) format, which you can open with Microsoft Excel.
Note: If you enable this option while an SD card is not present, you see SD
CARD FAULT.
- TROUBLESHOOT. (YES or NO). In User Mode, display calibration DAC
values.
- DEMO MODE. (YES or NO). Disable the communication link between the
console and the Main Control board. You can use this mode as a
troubleshooting tool by isolating the Control Console from the rest of
the system.
- BUCKY START. (EXPOSE or PREP). Determine whether the Bucky starts
when the prep button is pressed or when the Exposure button is
pressed.
• CHANGE PASSWORD. You can change the password for access to Service
Mode.
Note: If you forget your password, you must send the Control Console to your
support representative to be reset.

X-Ray Tube Alternatives


The Anthem generator is compatible with the following certified components.

Tube Brand Model


Comet DX93H - 0.6 X 1.5
Dunlee DU303M - 1.0 X 2.0
DU304M - 1.0 X 2.0
PX-1312 - 0.6 X 1.2
PX-1429 - 0.6 X 1.2
PX-1436 - 0.6 X 1.2
Eimac A119 - 1.0 X 2.0
A132 - 0.6 X 1.2
A292 - 0.6 X 1.2
Philips PG256 - 0.6 X 1.0

2-44 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Tube Brand Model


Toshiba DR-3724H - 0.6 X 1.2
E7239/UX-51H39 - 1.0 X 2.0
E7242/UX-51H42 - 0.6 X 1.5
E7252 0.6 X 1.2 (for TUBE SELECT, use RAD-14)
E7254 0.6 X 1.2 (for TUBE SELECT, use RAD-60)
E7255/UX-E7255 0.6 X 1.2
E7884/UX-E7884 0.6 X 1.2
Varian/Eureka RAD-8 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-13 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-14 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-16 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-21 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-25 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-40 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-56 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-60 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-68 - 0.6 X 1.2
RAD-68 - 1.0 X 2.0
RAD-74 - 0.6 X 1.5

Default User Screen Setup


To configure the default user screen, perform the following steps:
1. Place the Control Console in Administrative Mode. To do this, press and
hold the leftmost bottom-row multifunction button. While still pressing
the button turn on the console power switch.
When the Control Console boots up, you see the setup screen for
programming the default user screen.
2. Configure the settings as appropriate for your installation. Consult the
doctors and other operators to ensure the default screen meets their needs.
You can set defaults for the following parameters:
- startup mode (2-point or 3-point)
- 3-point kV
- 3-point mA
- 3-point time
- 2-point kV
- 2-point mAs
- image receptor (wall, table, or none)
- display contrast
3. Set the time and date. The Anthem generator uses a 24-hour clock.
a. select SET CLOCK

2 Installation 2-45
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

b. Select MONTH and use the data knob to select the correct month. Repeat
for DAY and YEAR. The console saves the changes automatically.
c. Select HOUR and use the data knob to select the correct hour. Repeat for
MIN and SEC. The console saves the changes automatically.
4. Press EXIT. The generator reboots to User Mode.

Upgrades Using the Option Key


You can use the Option Key feature to upgrade an Anthem console. You must
have a manufacturer-provided pair of software keys to perform this. With
custom keys, you can perform the following console changes:
• enable AEC
• enable DR (and disable APR if installed)
• disable DR
• change the console power rating to one of the following:
- 30-400
- 30-500
- 32-500
- 40-500
- 40-600
- 50-650
A key pair can be used only with a specific serial number that is programmed
into the console, and provides only one specific combination of upgrades/
changes.
To install options or change the power level on a console, perform the
following steps:
1. Obtain the key pair required to upgrade the console. The key pair is two
sets of 8 hexadecimal digits, e.g., 12345678 90ABCDEF.
2. Place the Control Console in Service Mode. To do this, press and hold the
second-from-left bottom-row multifunction button. While still pressing
the button turn on the console power switch.
When the Control Console boots up, you are prompted for a password. It
shows the default password of 0000.
3. With 0000 displayed, press OK.
If your password is not 0000, use the top-row multifunction buttons and
the data knob to select the correct password digits, then press OK.
The Service Mode Menu appears.
4. Press MISC OPTIONS. You see the MISC. OPTIONS screen.
5. Press KEY OPTIONS. You see the OPTION KEY screen.
6. Use the left and right cursor buttons and the data knob to assign the
correct option key digits, then press UNLOCK. You see VALID KEYS, then

2-46 2 Installation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

you might see ADJUSTING APR. After a few seconds you are returned to
the Service Mode screen.
7. Press EXIT. The generator reboots to User Mode, with the new changes in
effect.

2.3.8 Installing the Del APR Utility Software

Required Hardware
• Laptop or desktop PC running Windows XP or later.
• Internet connection.

Installation
1. Navigate a web browser to http://support.delmedical.com and log in to your
Del Medical customer support account.
2. Go to Product Information > Generators > Anthem. Under Software,
click on ANTHEM APR Utility v. 4.5 and download the file for this link,
which is filename APR_Utility45.zip.
3. Unzip the Del APR Utility files to a temporary folder on your hard drive
(e.g., ...\MyDocuments\APRtemp)
4. Exit all other applications.
5. Go into folder APR_Utility_4.5 and run (double click) setup.exe.
6. Verify that the default destination of the Del APR Utility Software is as
shown below (C:\Program files\DelAprUtility, or for a 64-bit computer,
C:\Program Files (x86)).

7. Click the icon button to continue and complete installation.

2 Installation 2-47
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8. Verify that the APR Utility is installed, as shown below.

9. Verify that the APR Utility starts, as shown below.

2.3.9 Initial Calibration


The Anthem generator is now ready for calibration. To begin calibration, see
“Calibration Procedure” on page 3-1.

2-48 2 Installation
3 Calibration and Adjustments

Calibration and
Adjustments 3
3.1 Introduction
This chapter provides calibration and adjustment procedures for the
generator.

Warning
All service and maintenance, including the procedures described
within this chapter, are to be performed by qualified service
personnel only.

3.2 Calibration Procedure


Perform this procedure after initial installation of the Anthem generator.

3.2.1 Preparations

Test Equipment and Tools Required


• dual-trace storage oscilloscope
• digital multimeter/mAs-meter
• Radcal Dynalyzer™ (optional)
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Caution
The following procedures produces X-rays. Take precautions to
ensure the safety of all personnel in the area. Minimum precautions
are as follows:
- Wear lead aprons.
- Personnel remaining in the X-ray room during exposure must
be behind a lead shield.
- Minimize radiation scatter through doorways, walls and floor.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-1


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Connecting and Setting the Oscilloscope


1. Ensure that the Main Power disconnect is OFF.
2. Remove the Power Module front cover and open the door.
3. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 and 2 to the Main Control board test
points as shown below.

Channel Probe Ground lead


1 TP6A (kV) TP22A
2 TP47A (mA) TP22B

TP22A
Channel 1
TP6A

TP47A
Channel 2
TP22B

Figure 3-1. Main Control board calibration test points

4. Set the oscilloscope as follows:

Channel 1 Channel 2
Vertical 2 V/div. Vertical 1 V/div.
Horizontal 10 ms/div. Horizontal 10 ms/div.
Mode Normal Sweep Mode Normal Sweep
Trigger Channel 1 - Positive

Note: If you are calibrating with only a scope, read the values of kV and mA as
follows:

From Channel #1:


For kV: 1 V = 20 kV

From Channel #2:


For mA, small spot: 1 V = 20 mA
For mA, large spot: 1 V = 100 mA

3-2 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Connecting the mAs Meter (if used)


1. On the lower cabinet, unscrew the four front panel screws (Figure 3-2) and
remove the front panel.

Figure 3-2. Front panel screw locations

2. On the top of the HT Tank, unscrew the 2 feedback board cover mounting
screws (Figure 3-3). Remove the cover.

Feedback Board
Cover Mounting
Screws

Figure 3-3. Feedback board cover.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-3


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. Loosen the red and black binding posts (Figure 3-4).

Binding Posts

Figure 3-4. Binding posts that hold copper jumper J2 on the feedback board.

4. Remove the copper jumper J2 (Figure 3-5).

Jumper

Figure 3-5. Removal of jumper J2.

5. Connect the mAs meter, black wire to black plug and red wire to red plug
(Figure 3-6).

Black

Red

Figure 3-6. mAs-meter connected to the feedback board.

3-4 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Initial Exposure

Warning
Lethal voltages are present on the large filter capacitors in this unit.
Exercise extreme caution when working near the long copper bus bars
attached to the large capacitors in the power module. Never perform
any service work inside the generator without first performing the
“Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2. Always verify with a DC
voltmeter that all three capacitors (two mounted to the back wall and
one on the bottom of the power module) are discharged before
attempting any service in this area.

Warning
Do not touch any part of the mAs meter during exposures.
Dangerously high voltages may be present.

1. Turn the main line switch “ON”.


2. Turn the Anthem Control Console on and set techniques as listed in the
table below.

Mode 2 Points
kV 40 kV
mAs 1 mAs

3. Make an exposure to verify the functionality of the generator.

3.2.2 Entering Service Mode


Perform calibration in Service Mode. Start the control console in Service Mode
as follows:
1. Press and hold the second-from-left bottom-row button, and while
holding this button, turn on the console power switch.
When the Control Console boots up, you are prompted for a password. It
shows the default password of 0000.
2. With 0000 displayed, press OK.
If your password is not 0000, use the top-row multifunction buttons and
the data knob to set the correct password digits, then press OK.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-5


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

You see the Service Mode menu.

3.2.3 mA Calibration
1. From the Service Mode menu, press CALIBRATE. You see the Main
Calibration Screen.

2. Press mA. You see STEP 1 in the upper left corner, and the following values
displayed in the center:
LARGE
100mA, 75kV, 50ms

3-6 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. Make an exposure and observe the waveform on oscilloscope channel 2.


The flat part of the wave should stabilize at 1.0 V (example in Figure 3-7).
If not, proceed to the next step.

Stabilized at 1V

Figure 3-7. mA wave on oscilloscope channel 2

4. Select MA DAC, and use the data knob to adjust the mA DAC value to
achieve the 1.0 V target level (STEP 1 in Table 3-1).

Console STEP Calibration point Voltage at channel 2 (mA)


number
STEP 1 100 mA, large focal spot 1.0 V
STEP 2 400 mA, large focal spot 4.0 V
STEP 3 600 mA, large focal spot 6.0 V (models 40-600 and
50-650 only)
STEP 4 25 mA, small focal spot 1.25 V
STEP 5 100 mA, small focal spot 5.0 V
Table 3-1. mA calibration points
5. If needed, repeat the previous two steps.
6. When you have achieved the target reading on the oscilloscope, press
SAVE.
7. Press NEXT STEP to go to STEP 2. Repeat 3 through 6 above for the
remaining mA calibration steps. Always press SAVE for each step.
8. After the last STEP, press EXIT.

Note: If the mA overshoot (characterized by a hump at the leading edge of the


waveform in Figure 3-7) is too high to see a stabilized level, adjust the FIL DAC value
to compensate. However, this parameter is temporary when you adjust it during mA
calibration, and is permanently calibrated only during “Pre-Heat Calibration” on
page 3-8.

Continue to the next calibration section.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-7


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3.2.4 kV Calibration
1. From the Main Calibration screen, select KV. You see STEP 1 in the upper
left corner, and the following values displayed in the center:
200mA, 40kV, 50ms
2. Make an exposure and observe the waveform on oscilloscope channel 1. If
the flat top of the wave (see Figure 3-8) is at 2.0 V, go to Step 5. If not,
proceed to the next step.
3. Select KV DAC, and use the data knob to adjust the kV DAC value to
achieve the 2.0 V target level (per Table 3-2).

Figure 3-8. kV on oscilloscope channel 1

Console STEP number Calibration point Voltage at channel 1 (V))


STEP 1, STEP 3, STEP 5 40 kV 2.0 V
STEP 2, STEP 4 120 kV 6.0 V
STEP 6 75 kV 3.75 V
Table 3-2. kV calibration points

4. If needed, repeat the previous two steps.


5. When you have achieved the target reading on the oscilloscope, press
SAVE.
6. Press NEXT STEP to go to STEP 2. Repeat 3 through 6 above for the
remaining kV calibration steps. Always press SAVE for each step.
7. After the last STEP, press EXIT.
Continue to the next calibration section.

3.2.5 Pre-Heat Calibration


1. From the Main Calibration screen, select PRE-HEAT. You see the following
values displayed in the center:
SMALL
25mA, 40kV, 50ms
2. Press NEXT PREHEAT. You see 1 appear above NEXT PREHEAT.

3-8 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. Make an exposure and compare the waveform on oscilloscope channel 2


to those in Figure 3-9. The goal is a squared-off waveform as in the third
illustration (Fil DAC good).

Fil DAC too high Fil DAC too low Fil DAC good
Figure 3-9. oscilloscope screens for high, low, and good Fil DAC settings.

4. Select FIL DAC, and use the data knob to adjust the Fil DAC value to
achieve the target shape.
5. If needed, repeat the previous two steps.
6. When you have achieved the target waveform shape on the oscilloscope,
press SAVE.
7. Press NEXT PREHEAT. You see 2 appear above NEXT PREHEAT.
8. Repeat 3 through 7 above for the remaining pre-heat calibration steps.
Always press SAVE for each step.
9. When you press NEXT PREHEAT and you again see 1 appear above NEXT
PREHEAT, press GLOBAL ADJUST. In the center, you see ARE YOU SURE?
Press YES.

Advanced Pre-heat Calibration


Pre-heat calibration requires value settings for numerous combinations of
kV and mA values. When you use the NEXT PREHEAT and GLOBAL ADJUST
buttons, as in the procedure above, you are setting only four data points.
The GLOBAL ADJUST button then interpolates and assigns values for the
in-between data points.
You can perform a more precise pre-heat calibration procedure by
manually setting FIL DAC values for each kV-mA combination. When you
use this process, you do not use the NEXT PREHEAT or the GLOBAL ADJUST
buttons.

10. Press EXIT to return to the Main Calibration Screen.


11. Press EXIT and allow the generator to complete the power-up sequence.
You have completed the calibration process.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-9


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3.3 Managing the APR Database


You can use a Windows PC to edit, back up, restore, and organize the Control
Console APR configuration settings. Typically you download data from the
Control Console to a PC running the Del APR Utility, edit settings, then
upload the modified data back to the Control Console.
Note: This feature is not available on Anthem generators with DR activated.

Required Equipment
• Laptop computer, running Windows 98 or later.
• SD memory card.
• SD memory card adapter (if PC or laptop has no SD card slot).
• Interface cable:
- USB to DB9 active-circuit adapter cable, (Digi-Key part number 768-
1013-ND or equivalent), or
- DB9 female to DB9 female, wired pin-to-pin (Digi-Key part AE1016-ND
or equivalent). This is NOT a Null Modem or RS232 cable.

SD card

USB-DB9 adapter
DB9 cable

card reader

Figure 3-10. APR database download/upload hardware options

3.3.1 Starting the APR Utility Program


If you have not yet installed the Del APR Utility software, see “Installing the Del
APR Utility Software” on page 2-47.
Start the Del APR Utility program on the laptop or PC by double clicking the
icon on the desktop or by choosing the Del APR Utility software in the
Program menu.
When the APR Utility Program first starts, before any data has been
downloaded from the Control Console, it displays the default APR database.
This database is not yet optimized for the tube in your generator.

3-10 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Caution
Do not perform any database optimization until you have selected the
X-ray tube installed with your generator. Incorrect tube selection may
cause permanent damage to the X-ray tube and generator.

3.3.2 Selecting a Connection Method


Determine an APR database download/upload method from the following
choices:
• USB or DB9 serial port - see “Downloading APR Configuration Data with
a Cable or Adapter” on page 3-11 and “Uploading APR Configuration
Data with a Cable or Adapter” on page 3-16.
• SD memory card - see “Downloading APR Configuration Data with an
SD Card” on page 3-13, and “Uploading APR Configuration Data with an
SD Card” on page 3-17.

3.3.3 Downloading APR Configuration Data with a Cable or Adapter


1. Plug the adapter’s USB end or the cable’s DB9 end into the laptop.
2. Turn the console power switch to OFF.
3. Plug the other (DB9) end of the adapter or cable into the DB9 connector at
the rear of the Control Console (1 in Figure 3-11).

1
Figure 3-11. DB9 connector at the rear of the Control Console

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-11


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Enter Service Mode (“Entering Service Mode” on page 3-5). You see the
Service Mode menu.

5. Press FLASH OPTIONS.


6. Press LAPTOP TRANSFER. You see WAITING FOR CMD.
(To cancel this mode and return to the previous screen, press EXIT.)
7. On the PC, start the APR Utility application (DelAprUtility)
8. On the APR Utility screen, Data Transfer, click the Get Data button. The
status window beneath the button indicates that the program is contacting
the console, waiting for data, downloading data, and verifying the
checksum.
When the download is complete, the APR utility displays CRC Valid and
the Control Console shows the number of bytes transferred.
The APR utility is now loaded with the APR configuration data from the
generator.

3-12 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3.3.4 Downloading APR Configuration Data with an SD Card


1. With the SD memory card contacts facing upward, insert the card in the
SD slot at the rear of the Control Console.

Figure 3-12. Inserting SD memory card in the Control Console.

2. Enter Service Mode (“Entering Service Mode” on page 3-5). You see the
Service Mode menu.

3. Press FLASH OPTIONS.


4. Press EXPORT APR. If an APR file already exists on the SD card, the console
asks if you want to overwrite it. The control screen shows that it is
exporting the data. When the export to the card is complete, the console
returns to the FLASH OPTIONS screen.
5. Remove the SD memory card from the Control Console and insert it in the
laptop (or card reader) SD slot.
6. On the laptop APR Utility, select File -> Load and navigate to the SD card.
Select the file APRUSER and click OK.
The APR utility is now loaded with the APR configuration data from the
generator.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-13


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3.3.5 Editing the APR Database


The Del APR Utility software lets you edit the technique parameters for each
patient study technique. You can make changes on an individual technique
basis, or use the Global Adjustments feature to simultaneously apply changes
to a group of techniques.

The APR Utility Screen


Figure 3-13 show the APR Utility screen after it is loaded with APR default
settings.

Figure 3-13. Del APR utility screen

The APR Utility user interface screen consists of the following parts:
Generator Parameters. These unchangeable parameters show the Anthem
generator configuration. They must match the connected generator or else the
APR Utility cannot exchange settings with the console.
Region. Click a radio button to view/edit 1 of 8 regions. These selections
correspond to the console APR first-level screen.
View. Click a radio button to view/edit 1 of 12 views. These selections
correspond to the console APR second-level screen.
Index. This displays the individual parameter values for each of 20 indexes
(density values in cm) for the selected Region/View. (Use the scrollbar at the
bottom to view Index 11-20.) This defines each of the 20 values that are
selectable from the console APR Thickness button ( ). To change a value,
__ cm
25cm

double-click the value box.

3-14 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

AEC Options. Corresponding to the console right-hand column when AEC is


activated, use this part to activate and set AEC parameters for the selected
Region/View.
Bucky. Select the image receptor for the selected Region/View.
Patient Size. Select the patient size for the selected Region/View. Numeric
values Small, Medium, and Large can vary depending on the selected
Region/View. You can change these default values with the APR Utility, but
not from the console.
Global Adjustments. You can modify kVp and mAs values and apply the
changes to all indexes in a View, in a Region, or for all APR techniques. First
set the global mode (All, Region, or View), then select a kVp value to add to
the existing value, or an mAs value by which to multiply the existing value.
Each selection of a value is cumulative. The Undo button can undo multiple
operations when pressed repeatedly.

Creating New Anatomical Views


To rename any anatomical region or view within a region, in the upper two
text boxes, wipe over the existing text or white space, and type the new name.
Results are shown in the third, bottom box. Note that renaming a technique
does not automatically change the parameters already programmed for that
location.
In all available anatomic regions, there are up to 12 available views, with 20
available densities per view (indexed 1 to 20). You can create new views
within any anatomic region by selecting a Spare view (see Figure 3-14), and
assigning it a name.

Figure 3-14. New regional views can be created in SPARE View fields.

When creating a new view, you must enter exposure technique data for all 20
densities. After entering the kV, mA, and time for all available selections in
the new view, you must optimize the view for your X-ray tube, using the
View selection within the Global Adjustments section on APR Utility screen,
and selecting a mAs multiplier of 1.0.
You must enter the value for patient thickness (in cm) for all thicknesses
allowed within this view. To limit the available patient thickness of any
view, enter a value of 0 for all non-required selections.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-15


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Did the column header turn red when you changed a parameter?
Technique changes that fall outside the tube protection profile for the selected
X-ray tube are not allowed, and cause the column header to turn red.
Changing the excessive value of mA, Time, or kV clears this error.

3.3.6 Uploading APR Configuration Data with a Cable or Adapter


After modification, you can upload the optimized APR database to the
Control Console in a similar manner as the download process.

Note: The database downloaded from an Anthem generator contains the specific
signature of that generator’s power limit, tube type, and derating status. Because of
this, you can upload a database to only be a generator equipped with the same tube,
generator power limit, and derating status.

1. Plug the adapter’s USB end or the cable’s DB9 end into the laptop.
2. Plug the other (DB9) end of the adapter or cable into the DB9 connector at
the rear of the Control Console.
3. Enter Service Mode (“Entering Service Mode” on page 3-5). You see the
Service Mode menu.

4. Press FLASH OPTIONS.


5. Press LAPTOP TRANSFER. You see WAITING FOR CMD.
(To cancel this mode and return to the previous screen, press EXIT.)
6. On the laptop APR Utility, Data Transfer, click the Send Data button.
The APR Utility connects with the Control Console, transfers the data, and
verifies the checksum. When this process is complete, the APR Utility
displays Flash Updated, and the Control Console returns to the WAITING
FOR CMD state.
7. At the Control Console, exit all utility screens by pressing EXIT at all
prompts. The Control Console then reboots into normal operating mode.

3-16 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

The Control Console is now loaded with the APR configuration data from the
PC.

3.3.7 Uploading APR Configuration Data with an SD Card


After modification, you can save settings to a file on an SD memory card, plug
the SD card into the Control Console, and write the new settings into the
console memory.

Note: The database downloaded from any generator contains the specific signature of
that generator’s power limit, tube type, and derating status. As a result, the database
may only be uploaded to a generator equipped with the same tube, generator power
limit, and derating status.

1. When the APR data has been modified in the Del APR Utility software
chose File -> Save in the Menu and save the new modified data to the SD
memory card. Name the file APRUSER.csv. DO NOT name the file
anything else.
2. Remove the SD card from the PC/laptop. With the SD memory card
contacts facing upward, insert the card in the SD slot at the rear of the
Control Console.
3. Enter Service Mode (“Entering Service Mode” on page 3-5). You see the
Service Mode menu.

4. Press FLASH OPTIONS.


5. Press Import APR. The console screen shows that it is importing the data.
When the import from the card is complete, the console returns to the
FLASH OPTIONS screen.
The upload of APR data is now complete.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-17


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3.3.8 Error Messages


Data Mismatch - Aborted: The X-Ray tube selected does not match the tube
on the Anthem generator. Reselect the X-Ray tube and re-attempt the send.
Errors in Database - Aborted: The upload failed because the database
contains disallowed settings as indicated on screen with red dots next to
settings or menu cells shaded red. Click Cancel to continue.
Error! CRC or time-out: This message occurs during a console flash update.
This has no affect on sending the database. Continue as normal.

3.4 AEC Calibration Procedure


The AEC calibration procedure adjusts parameters in the Anthem generator’s
optional Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) feature to match the particular
film/screen and film processing system installed. The Anthem AEC circuitry
lets you compensate for the non-linear response of commonly used film-
screen combinations.
You can calibrate the AEC feature for six different response curves:
• screen 100
• screen 200
• screen 300
• screen 400
• screen 800
• CR
Perform the calibration procedure for each film speed that must appear on the
operator’s console. After AEC calibration, only those film speed that you have
calibrated will appear.
A typical system has a table 3-field detector and a wallstand 3-field detector.
When you select an image receptor at the console, the Anthem automatically
selects the appropriate detector. Each Anthem input has offset adjustments
and gain controls, which you adjust in this procedure.

Warning
The following procedure produces X-rays. Take precautions to ensure
your safety and the safety of others in close proximity. Minimum
precautions are as follows:
a. Wear lead aprons.
b. Persons in the room during exposure must be behind a lead shield.
c. Minimize radiation scatter through doorways, walls and floor.

Test Equipment Required:


• Calibrated Anthem generator

3-18 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

• Densitometer capable of measuring optical film densities of .5 to 2.5 ± .05


• X-Ray film and cassettes
• X-Ray film processor
• Miniature flat-tip screwdriver for pot adjustment
• Attenuating material, which can be the following:
- 10 acrylic panels, 1” (2.54cm) x 8” (20.3 cm) x 8” (20.3 cm), or
- flat bottom (no reinforcing ridges) plastic bucket with 12”
(30.5 cm of water.

Figure 3-15. Typical acrylic panel stack and densitometer

Warning
Ensure that main power circuit breaker for the generator is off and
console power switch is OFF before performing the following steps.
Otherwise, you may get severely shocked.

1. Connect the table ion chamber to J19 on the Anthem generator.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-19


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2. Connect the wallstand ion chamber to J21 at the front of the Anthem.

Figure 3-16. Ion chamber connections

3. On the Main Control board, verify that a jumper is connected between


position 2 and 3 on JP300 (middle position; see Figure 3-17 and Figure 7-2
on page 7-4). DO NOT remove this jumper or change the jumper position.

JP300
Figure 3-17. JP300 jumper connections

Warning
Use extreme caution when working around or adjusting the generator
when it is turned on and covers are off. Do not touch any circuits or
components. Circuits can carry lethal voltages which can severely
burn or electrocute you.

3-20 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Enter Service Mode (“Entering Service Mode” on page 3-5). You see the
Service Mode menu.

5. If AEC is not installed,


a. Press AEC INSTALLED. You then see a screen with buttons labeled
BUCKY AEC WALL and BUCKY AEC TABLE. Select YES for either or both, as
applicable.
b. Set AEC defaults (the values an operator sees when first entering AEC
mode). To do this, first set CHAMBER TYPE to either ION (ionization) or
SOLID (solid state).
c. Set the DEFAULT OD value, which is typically 1.2. Do not set the film
speed, as it is not relevant to calibration. Press EXIT. Make a note of the
selected optical density value. You will need this in step 10 below.
This is the OD value that the operator sees when first entering AEC
Mode.
Note: If you want to change the DEFAULT OD value and AEC is already
installed (AEC INSTALLED YES), then you must change AEC INSTALLED to NO
and perform step 5 above.
6. Press the CALIBRATE button. You see the Generator Calibration screen.
7. Press the AEC button.
8. Press the REMOVE CALIB button (1 in Figure 3-18) to clear all previous
calibration values.
9. Press the image receptor button (2) to select the chamber to calibrate
(either wall or table).
Note: For the wall chamber, perform calibration at 40” SID with no grid.
10. Press the DESIRED OD button (3) until you see the desired optical density.
Select the same OD that you selected in step 5, step c above. Your
calibration data will be saved under the selected OD and film speed
combination.
11. Press the CHAMBER TYPE button (4) to select the desired chamber type
(ION or SOLID STATE).

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-21


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

12. Press the FILM SCREEN button (5) until the desired film screen appears.
Note: The Anthem stores separate AEC calibration data for each film screen speed at
the desired OD. This lets you calibrate multiple film speeds.

13. Press the NEXT STEP button (6).

3 4

2
5
1 6

Figure 3-18. STEP 1 screen

14. Remove the grid from the image receptor.


15. Place 6 inches of acrylic (or water) over the center cell of the chamber you
are calibrating. Set SID to 40” and collimate the beam to cover the entire
cell. The 6” of acrylic or water is used for setting master gain and cell balancing.
16. Make an exposure and develop the film.
17. Check the optical density of the film with a densitometer.
18. To achieve the desired optical density, adjust the sensitivity potentiometer
located on the ion chamber pre-amp. Refer to the manufacturer’s ion
chamber manual for the location of this potentiometer.
The generator automatically displays the elapsed mAs (1 in Figure 3-19.)
during this step. This is your desired mAs during cell balancing.

3-22 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Note: On the Main Control board, P1 and P2 provide gain adjustment for the
table and wallstand chambers, respectively. However, do not adjust these unless
directed to do so.

Figure 3-19. STEP 2 screen and master gain adjustment

19. If needed, repeat step 16 and step 17. Do not re-adjust gain for the
remainder of the calibration.
20. Press the NEXT STEP button. You see the STEP 3 screen, as shown in Figure
3-20 on page 3-24 with the ion chamber’s right field highlighted (1).
21. Insert an empty (no film) cassette into the table.

Note: Be sure to collimate the beam to cover the upper two cells or all three cells.

22. Take an exposure and observe the elapsed mAs (2).


23. Verify that the elapsed mAs is within 10% of the desired mAs. If not,
adjust the individual gain adjustment on the chamber pre-amp for that cell
(4) until the elapsed mAs is within 10% of the desired mAs.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-23


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

24. Press the NEXT STEP button (3) to proceed to balance the left cell.

Figure 3-20. STEP 3 screen and ion chamber pots

25. You see the STEP 4 screen, as shown in Figure 3-21, with the ion chamber’s
left field (1) highlighted. Repeat step 22 and step 23 to balance the left
field.

Figure 3-21. STEP 4 screen

3-24 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

26. Press the NEXT STEP. You see the STEP 5 screen as shown in Figure 3-22..
Place 6” of acrylic or water in a bucket over the center cell. Collimate the
beam over the entire cell.
27. Place film in the cassette.
28. Take an exposure and develop the film.
29. Check the optical density of the film with a densitometer.
30. If the optical density is within 5% of DESIRED OD (1 in Figure 3-22), press
the NEXT STEP button (2) and skip to step 32 of this procedure.
31. If optical density is not within 5% of desired OD, adjust the AEC DAC value
(3) as follows:
a. Press the AEC DAC button (4) and use the data knob (5) to increase or
decrease the value. A clockwise turn increases the DAC value, thus
increasing OD and elapsed mAs.
b. When optical density is within 5% of the desired OD, press the SAVE
button (6).
c. Press the NEXT STEP button (2).
Note: You can calculate the new AEC DAC with the following formula:

Current AEC DAC X (DESIRED OD/Measured OD) = new AEC DAC

Example: 101 X (1.2/1.4) = 86 (set AEC DAC to this)

4 2
6

Figure 3-22. STEP 5 screen

32. STEP 6 appears as shown in Figure 3-23. Place 6” of acrylic or water in a


bucket over the center cell. Collimate the beam over the entire cell.
33. Place film in the cassette.
34. Take an exposure and develop the film.
35. Check the optical density of the film with a densitometer.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-25


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

36. If the optical density is within 5% of DESIRED OD (1 in Figure 3-23), press


the NEXT STEP button (2) and skip to step 38 of this procedure.
37. If optical density is not within 5% of desired OD, adjust the AEC DAC value
(3) as follows:
a. Press the AEC DAC button (4) and use the data knob (5) to increase or
decrease the DAC value. A clockwise turn increases the DAC value,
thus increasing OD and elapsed mAs.
b. When optical density is within 5% of the desired OD, press the SAVE
button (6).
c. Press the NEXT STEP button (2).
Note: You can calculate the new AEC DAC with the following formula:

Current AEC DAC X (DESIRED OD/Measured OD) = new AEC DAC

Example: 101 X (1.2/1.4) = 86 (set AEC DAC to this)

4 2
6

Figure 3-23. STEP 6 screen

38. STEP 7 appears as shown in Figure 3-24. Place 6” of acrylic or water in a


bucket over the center cell. Collimate the beam over the entire cell.
39. Place film in the cassette.
40. Take an exposure and develop the film.
41. Check the optical density of the film with a densitometer.
42. If the optical density is within 5% of DESIRED OD (1 in Figure 3-24), AEC
calibration is complete for this receptor.
43. If optical density is not within 5% of desired OD, adjust the AEC DAC
value (3) as follows:

3-26 3 Calibration and Adjustments


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

a. Press the AEC DAC button (4) and use the data knob (5) to increase or
decrease the DAC value. A clockwise turn increases the DAC value,
thus increasing OD and elapsed mAs.
b. When optical density is within 5% of the desired OD, press the SAVE
button (6).
c. Press the NEXT STEP button (2).
Note: You can calculate the new AEC DAC with the following formula:

Current AEC DAC X (DESIRED OD/Measured OD) = new AEC DAC

Example: 101 X (1.2/1.4) = 86 (set AEC DAC to this)

4 2
6

Figure 3-24. STEP 7 screen

AEC calibration is complete.

3.5 Verification of AEC Safety

3.5.1 Generator Backup mAs and Reset Function:


In 3-Point mode, select 70kV, 200mA, and 100ms. Cover the fields with 15cm
(6’’) phantom. Take an exposure and note the elapsed mAs. Change the back-
up time until the mAs (display on the console) is 5% less than the elapsed
mAs. Take an exposure. The error “Backup mAs term” displays on the
console.
Press the reset button and change the backup time until the mAs (display on
the console is 5% more than the elapsed mAs. Take an exposure. No errors
occur.

3 Calibration and Adjustments 3-27


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3-28 3 Calibration and Adjustments


4 Acceptance Testing

Acceptance Testing
4
4.1 Acceptance Testing for Regulatory Compliance
The following sections identify required safety- and compliance-related
installation actions, which include the following activities:
• installation inspection per documented criteria
• installation approval
• creation and delivery of an acceptance report document

4.1.1 Installation Responsibilities


Del Medical establishes and maintains comprehensive installation and
inspection instructions, and, where appropriate, test procedures and
acceptance criteria for ensuring proper installation and performance.
As dealers/installers and distributors are responsible for the compliant
installation of components and/or complete X-ray systems, Del Medical
provides installation guidance documents that support the verification
process.
Del Medical dealers/installers shall ensure that the installation, inspection,
and required testing steps are performed in accordance with Del Medical
guidance documents and all applicable federal, state and, regional
regulations.
The installer shall document these inspections and test results, which serve as
evidence of a proper installation, and shall provide Del Medical with
documentation reflecting such test acceptance results.
Note: At the completion of repairs or maintenance, appropriate sections of this
workbook and check sheet can be used as evidence of a completed process
Del Medical considers the Acceptance Testing Check Sheet included in this
chapter (or document 8000-IVRC02), the US FDA Form 2579, a physicists
report or, equivalent documents as evidence.
The above listed forms will be maintained within Del Medical confidential
records per Del Medical retention procedures.
An Acceptance Testing Check Sheet is included with Del Medical installation
manuals or available via Del Medical Technical Support Group. Send
completed documentation to the following address:

4 Acceptance Testing 4-1


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Del Medical, Inc.


Technical Support
241 Covington Dr.
Bloomingdale, IL 60108

or, QARA@delmedical.com

4.1.2 Reporting Responsibilities


FDA 21 CFR 1002.40 requires dealers and distributors to report installation
location information to Del Medical, unless the dealer or distributer provides
a written declaration that they will maintain such records. If these records are
deliberately retained by the dealer or distributor, the information must be
furnished immediately on demand if requested by Del Medical or a
representative of the US Food and Drug Administration.
Location information must include the following:
• Name and mailing address of the purchaser to whom the product was
transferred.
• Identification and brand name of the product.
• Product model and serial number, or other identification number.
• Date of sale, award, or lease.
If the dealer or distributer discontinues dealing in or distributing Del Medical
products, the aforementioned installation location records must be furnished,
at that time, to Del Medical.

4.1.3 Incident Reporting


In compliance with US FDA, Health Canada, European Union, ISO, and CE
requirements, Del Medical dealers and distributors are required to report any
and all information regarding possible incidents involving Del Medical
products that have or might result in serious injury or death. Incidents can
include deterioration in product characteristics and performance, as well as
any inaccuracies in the product documentation.

4-2 4 Acceptance Testing


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4.2 Acceptance Testing Check Sheet


After system installation is complete, use the following check sheet to
document the completion of verification tests. This check sheet applies a
variety of system configurations. Some tests might not apply to your system.
If a section does not apply, fill in the fields with “N/A”.
Note: For supporting information, see FDA 21 CFR 1020.30 and, 1020.31,
European Commission Radiation Protection Number 162 Section 2.2 and Health
Canada Safety Code 35, Appendix VI.

Purchaser Information

Provider Center Name

Address

State/Province Postal/Zip Code


Country

Contact Name

Contact Phone

Contact Email

Date of sale/award/lease

System Information

System Seller

System Installer

System ID

System Brand

4 Acceptance Testing 4-3


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

System Components

Generator

Table

Wallstand

Collimator

X-Ray Tube

Workstation

Detector #1

Detector #2

Other

Other

Generator Tests

Generator Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

kVp accuracy within gen- kVp at setting = 50 kVp  Pass  Fail


erator published specifi-
cations kVp at setting = 75 kVp  Pass  Fail
kVp at setting = 100 kVp  Pass  Fail

mA accuracy within gen- mA at setting = 100 mA  Pass  Fail


erator published specifi-
cations mA at setting = 200 mA  Pass  Fail
mA at setting = 300 mA  Pass  Fail

Timer (ms) accuracy ms at setting = 0.01 ms  Pass  Fail


within generator pub-
lished specifications ms at setting = 0.1 ms  Pass  Fail
ms at setting = 0.25 ms  Pass  Fail

mAs accuracy (coefficient mAs at setting = 1.0 mAs  Pass  Fail


of variation) within gener-
ator published specifica- mAs at setting = 10 mAs  Pass  Fail
tions
mAs at setting = 50 mAs  Pass  Fail

4-4 4 Acceptance Testing


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Exposure Reproducibility Tests

Subtract
Measured Mean Squared
Set 1 Verification Task (Kn) (Dn = Kn - K) (Dn2)

Repeated dose measure- Dose, exposure #1


ments for a performance
deviation calculation Dose, exposure #2

Dose, exposure #3

generator settings: Dose, exposure #4


kV Dose, exposure #5
mA
Dose, exposure #6
ms
Dose, exposure #7
mAs
Dose, exposure #8

Dose, exposure #9

Dose, exposure #10

Calculate the sum of all Ksum = K1 + K2 + ... K10


measured doses.

Calculate the average K = Ksum / 10


(mean) dose K.

Divide K by mAs. This R1 = K / mAs


value is used for the Lin-
earity calculation.

Calculate the sum of all the D2sum =


squared differences
D12 + D22 + ... D102

Divide the sum of the


squared differences by 9. SD = D2sum
Then calculate the square 9
root of that result. This is
standard deviation SD.

Divide SD by K. This is CV = SD / K  Pass  Fail


coefficient of variation CV. must be ≤ 0.045 (4.5%)

4 Acceptance Testing 4-5


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Subtract
Measured Mean Squared
Set 2 Verification Task (Kn) (Dn = Kn - K) (Dn2)

Repeated dose measure- Dose, exposure #1


ments for a performance
deviation calculation Dose, exposure #2

Dose, exposure #3

generator settings: Dose, exposure #4


kV Dose, exposure #5
mA
Dose, exposure #6
ms
Dose, exposure #7
mAs
Dose, exposure #8

Dose, exposure #9

Dose, exposure #10

Calculate the sum of all Ksum = K1 + K2 + ... K10


measured doses.

Calculate the average K = Ksum / 10


(mean) dose K.

Divide K by mAs. This R2 = K / mAs


value is used for the Lin-
earity calculation.

Calculate the sum of all the D2sum =


squared differences
D12 + D22 + ... D102

Divide the sum of the


squared differences by 9. SD = D2sum
Then calculate the square 9
root of that result. This is
standard deviation SD.

Divide SD by K. This is CV = SD / K  Pass  Fail


coefficient of variation CV. must be ≤ 0.045 (4.5%)

4-6 4 Acceptance Testing


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Exposure Linearity Tests

Operation Verification Task Value Result

Transfer R1 and R2 val- Reproducibility result from Set 1,


ues from the Exposure R 1.
Reproducibility Tests
table. Reproducibility result from Set 2,
R 2.

Calculate the difference R 1 - R2


of the set 1/set 2 repro- L=  Pass  Fail
R 1 + R2
ducibility results divided
by their sum. must be ≤ 0.095 (9.5%)

Beam Quality Test

Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

Beam Quality Half Value kVp at setting = 75 kVp; minimum


 Pass  Fail
Layer (HVL) HVL = 2.7

kVp at setting = 100 kVp; mini-


 Pass  Fail
mum HVL = 3.6

AEC Calibration Test

Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

Minimum and maximum Zero body mass; max mAs = 5  Pass  Fail
mAs limits for AEC (Auto-
matic Exposure Control) Maximum body mass; max mAs =
(if equipped). Set kVp to 600  Pass  Fail
51.

4 Acceptance Testing 4-7


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

SID Accuracy Test

Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

Comparison of indicated- 40" (100 cm) SID, table receptor


 Pass  Fail
to-measured SID (recep- plane
tor plane to tube focal
spot) must not deviate by 40" (100 cm) SID, tabletop sur-
 Pass  Fail
more than 2%. face

40" (100 cm) SID, wallstand


 Pass  Fail
receptor plane

72" (180 cm) SID, wallstand


 Pass  Fail
receptor plane

Collimator Light Field Tests

Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

Test/inspect the collima- Compare edge alignment of X-ray


tor light field for alignment field and light field. Must not  Pass  Fail
and size compared to the exceed 2% of SID.
X-ray field, and also illu-
mination. Light field illumination at maxi-
mum SID up to 100 cm. Must be
 Pass  Fail
160 lux (15 footcandles) mini-
mum.

Minimum field size at SID 40"


(100 cm). Must be 5 cm X 5 cm or  Pass  Fail
smaller.

Compare center alignment of


crosshairs to the table's receptor
 Pass  Fail
center. Must not exceed 2% of
SID.

Compare center alignment of


crosshairs to the wallstand's
 Pass  Fail
receptor center. Must not exceed
2% of SID.

Light field size display accuracy.


Set to 10X10 in or 25X25 cm,
 Pass  Fail
then measure actual size. Must
not exceed 2% of SID.

4-8 4 Acceptance Testing


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

PBL Performance Tests

Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

Test/inspect the PBL Prevent X-rays when the mea-


(Positive Beam Limita- sured length or width of the X-ray
tion) feature (if equipped) field in the plane of the image
 Pass  Fail
for its ability to inhibit or receptor differs from the receptor
allow the production of dimension by more than 3% of the
X-rays. SID.

Prevent X-rays when the sum of


the length and width differences  Pass  Fail
(above) exceeds 4% of SID.

Prevent X-rays when SID is less


 Pass  Fail
than 36" (92 cm).

Allow X-rays when the receptor is


inserted into a permanently  Pass  Fail
mounted cassette holder.

Allow X-rays when the beam axis


is within ±3° of vertical and the
SID is 90 - 130 cm, or the beam  Pass  Fail
axis is within ±3° of horizontal and
the SID is 90 - 205 cm.

Detector Evaluation

Test Type Verification Task Result

Digital detector image No image artifacts are observed.  Pass  Fail


quality evaluation; image
artifacts, spatial resolu- Measure more than 2.8 line pairs/mm for doses ≤ 10
 Pass  Fail
tion, and contrast. mGy.

At least 7 density steps are visible.  Pass  Fail

Workstation Communication Evaluation

Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

For the following tests, PACS communication test.  Pass  Fail


follow the system “Ser-
vice Utility” application Modality Worklist Communication Test  Pass  Fail
instructions.
DICOM Printer Verification Test  Pass  Fail
Modality Perform Procedure Step Test  Pass  Fail

4 Acceptance Testing 4-9


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Acceptance

Test Type Verification Task Measured Result

Final acceptance. All tests pass, or a written justification for exclusion of


 Pass  Fail
any test(s) is included with this report.

Acceptance Testing Performed By On Date

Return of Form
Mail the entire filled-out Acceptance Testing Check Sheet form to the
following address:
Del Medical, Inc.
Technical Support
241 Covington Dr.
Bloomingdale, IL 60108

4-10 4 Acceptance Testing


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4.3 Form Notes and Examples


Following are examples of how the Exposure Reproducibility Tests and
Exposure Linearity Tests forms might be filled out. The red-circled numbers
are references to the steps in the description found in Notes on
Reproducibility and Linearity Testing, below.

4.3.1 Notes on Reproducibility and Linearity Testing


This section provides a method for finding reproducibility and linearity
performance based on N-1 standard deviation calculations. 2 sets of 10
measurements are required, where each set uses different exposure settings.
This section does not specify generator settings.
To complete these tests and calculations, use the Exposure Reproducibility
Tests and Exposure Linearity Tests worksheets starting on page 5 and
perform the following steps.
1. Per your facility standards or equipment instructions, select a SID,
position the radiation probe, and collimate the beam.
2. Set kV/mA/ms or kV/mAs values for the first set of exposures. Record
these values in the Set 1 table.
3. Make 10 exposures. Record the dose value of each exposure in the Set 1
table.
4. Calculate the sum of all the dose values. Record this on the worksheet.
5. Calculate the average mean dose (K = sum of measured doses/10). Record
this on the worksheet.
6. Divide K by mAs. This value is used for the Linearity calculation.
7. For each exposure:
a. Calculate the difference (D) of each measured dose M from the average,
Dn = Kn - K. Record these values in the Subtract Mean column.

b. Square each difference value (Dn2). Record these values in the Squared
column.
8. Calculate the sum of all the squared differences. Record this on the
worksheet.
9. Divide the sum of the squared differences by 9. Then calculate the square
root of that result. This is standard deviation SD.
10. Divide SD by K. This is coefficient of variation CV. This value must be less
than or equal to 0.045 (4.5%). Record this value on the worksheet, and
record whether or not the test passes.
11. Repeat all prior steps for Set 2, using different exposure settings per
facility standards.

4 Acceptance Testing 4-11


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

For the Exposure Linearity Test, use the dose measurements previously
obtained.
12. Transfer the Reproducibility values from Set 1 and Set 2 to the Exposure
Linearity Tests worksheet.
13. Calculate the difference of the set 1/set 2 reproducibility results, divided
by their sum. This value must be less than or equal to 0.095 (9.5%).

Exposure Reproducibility Tests (Example)

Subtract
Measured Mean Squared
Set 1 Verification Task (Kn) (Dn = Kn - K) (Dn2)
3 7a 7b
Repeated dose measure- Dose, exposure #1 1.321 0.0006 0.00000036
ments for a performance
deviation calculation Dose, exposure #2 1.321 0.0006 0.00000036

Dose, exposure #3 1.322 0.0016 0.00000256

generator settings: Dose, exposure #4 1.321 0.0006 0.00000036


kV 50 Dose, exposure #5 1.317 0.0034 0.00001156
mA 400
Dose, exposure #6 1.319 0.0014 0.00000196
ms 100
Dose, exposure #7 1.319 0.0014 0.00000196
mAs 40
Dose, exposure #8 1.322 0.0016 0.00000256

Dose, exposure #9 1.321 0.0006 0.00000036

Dose, exposure #10 1.321 0.0006 0.00000036

Calculate the sum of all Ksum = K1 + K2 + ... K10 13.204


measured doses. 4

Calculate the average K = Ksum / 10 1.3204


(mean) dose K. 5

Divide K by mAs. This R1 = K / mAs 0.033


value is used for the Lin- 6
earity calculation.

Calculate the sum of all the D2sum = 0.00002240


squared differences
D12 + D22 + ... D102 8

Divide the sum of the 0.00158


squared differences by 9. SD = D2sum
Then calculate the square 9
9
root of that result. This is
standard deviation SD.

Divide SD by K. This is CV = SD / K 0.00119  Pass  Fail


coefficient of variation CV. must be ≤ 0.045 (4.5%) 10

4-12 4 Acceptance Testing


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Exposure Linearity Tests (Example)

Operation Verification Task Value Result

Transfer R1 and R2 val- Reproducibility result from Set 1, 0.033


ues from the Exposure R 1.
Reproducibility Tests 12
table. Reproducibility result from Set 2, 0.036
R 2.

Calculate the difference R 1 - R2 0.0434


of the set 1/set 2 repro- L=  Pass  Fail
R 1 + R2
ducibility results divided 13
by their sum. must be ≤ 0.095 (9.5%)

4 Acceptance Testing 4-13


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4-14 4 Acceptance Testing


5 Operation

Operation
5
5.1 Introduction
The Anthem generator operator’s Control Console features an easy-to-use
menu-driven, multifunction button user interface.

5.2 Safety Precautions


Before attempting to operate the generator, familiarize yourself with the
following safety concerns.

Caution

The following procedures produces X-rays. Take precautions to


ensure the safety of all personnel in the area. Minimum precautions
are as follows:
- Wear lead aprons.
- Personnel remaining in the X-ray room during exposure must
be behind a lead shield.
- Minimize radiation scatter through doorways, walls and floor.

Warning

This generator is intended for use as part of a system for the


generation of X-rays for medical diagnosis. X-rays are a potential risk
for both patients and operators. Thus, seek to minimize radiation
exposition to any persons.

Do not allow foreign objects that can attenuate or scatter the X-ray
beam between the X-ray tube and table top during exposure. Failure to
comply may result in serious injury.

Persons responsible for this application must have specific


knowledge according to legal requirements and regulations, and must
establish safe exposure procedures.

5 Operation 5-1
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5.3 Operator Control Console


Data Knob Prep Button
Multifunction Buttons

Expose Button

Display

Power Switch
Figure 5-1. Control Console

5.3.1 Control Console Description


Use the multifunction buttons, and data knob to select operation modes or
technique parameters. Use the prep and expose button to make an exposure.

Multifunction Buttons
Use the multifunction buttons to select parameters. There are two methods
available to change technique parameters:
• To change the values for settings such as kV, mAs, time, or mA, press the
button adjacent to that setting. The current value is then highlighted on
the screen. Change this value by turning the data knob clockwise to
increment or counterclockwise to decrement the value.
• For other parameters, such as the selection of focal spots, film receptors, or
modes, press the multifunction button repeatedly to step through the
possible values.

5-2 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Data Knob
Use the data knob in conjunction with the kV, mAs, time, and centimeter
thickness buttons. When you press one of those buttons, the associated
parameter highlights the screen in reverse video. Change the values by
turning the knob.

Prep and Expose Buttons


To make an exposure, press and hold down the prep button (on the left).
When the green READY light goes on, continue holding down prep and press
and hold down the expose button (on the right). When the exposure occurs,
the yellow EXPOSE light goes on and you hear a tone for the duration of the
exposure. When the exposure has completed, both lights go off and you can
then release the two buttons. See “Making an Exposure” on page 5-13

READY EXPOSE

FP10-0014.00 FP10-0013.00

prep expose

Figure 5-2. Prep and expose buttons with indicator lights

These buttons perform the same functions as the 2-position handswitch and
footswitch. Depressing the handswitch or footswitch to its first position is
equivalent to pressing the prep button. Depressing the handswitch or
footswitch to its second position is equivalent to simultaneously holding to
the prep button and pressing the expose button.

5.3.2 Display Parameters and Symbols


Each multifunction button is defined by corresponding text or symbols on the
central display screen. An undefined button has no effect when pressed.
Pressing a defined button either toggles through a choice of options or allows
a parameter to be changed by the data knob.

5 Operation 5-3
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Top Row Buttons

Symbol/Text Description
kV Tube voltage value. This parameter typically controls con-
trast. Use the data knob to change the kV value in single
digit increments.
mAs (2-Point only) mAs value. mAs is an optimized composite
of tube current and exposure time values. Use the data
knob to change the mAs value in pre-determined steps.
mA (3-Point only) Tube current value. This parameter typically
controls image intensity, or darkness. Use the data knob
to change the mA value from 25 mA to 650 mA.
ms (3-Point only) Exposure time. Use the data knob to
change the ms value. Although you can select time val-
ues, the actual exposure duration is controlled by the mAs
timer. You can select from the following values:.010, .012,
.015, .020, .025, .030, .035, .040, .050, .060, .070, .080,
.09, 0.1, 0.12, 0.15, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75,
0.9, 1.0, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, and 6.0.
Toggle between 2 point and 3 point technique modes.
In 2-point mode, you select only the kV and mAs of an
2 POINT exposure. The generator calculates the mA value to pro-
duce the shortest possible exposure duration for the
3 POINT selected technique, while protecting the X-ray tube from
overloads.
In the 3-point mode, you select the kV, mA, and ms of the
exposure. Selections are limited by the X-ray tube over-
load circuit. If you see an Exceeds Tube Limits mes-
2 POINT sage, readjust either the kV, mA, or ms of the technique
3 POINT before making an exposure.

5-4 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Left Column Buttons

Symbol/Text Description
Image Receptor Selection
• Table - The receptor is in the table and is not DR.
• Table Top (available with DR only) - The receptor is
on the table top, or is DR.
• Wall - The receptor is in a wallstand.
• NO BUCKY - The receptor is not in a table or
NO BUCKY wallstand.
Focal Spot Size
The focal spot size is pre-programmed to optimize the
image quality. The left symbol indicates large focal spot
and the right symbol indicates small focal spot.
Thickness
(APR only) For patient size, use either this button or the
__ cm
25cm Patient Size button. When you the select the thickness in
FP10-0022.0 centimeters (with the data knob), each cm value sets a
pre-programmed kV/mA/time combination. There are 20
combinations to select from, and the set of combinations
can vary with each Region/View. You program each of
these combinations using the APR Utility program (“Edit-
ing the APR Database” on page 3-14).
Patient Size
(APR only) For patient size, use either this button or the
Thickness button. This button toggles between small,
medium, and large patient size. Each size is pre-pro-
FP 0 002 00
grammed to select one of the Thickness values above,
and the selections can vary with each Region/View.

Bottom Row Buttons

Symbol/Text Description
APR Operating Mode
When in Manual Mode, pressing this button switches to
APR mode. If already in APR mode, this button takes you
back to a previous APR-mode screen.
Manual Operating Mode
Displayed only in APR Mode, this button switches to
Manual mode.
Go back
This symbol appears when an error message occurs.
This button takes you back to the previous screen.

AEC
Toggle on or off the AEC (Automatic Exposure Control)
feature.

5 Operation 5-5
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5.4 Power On/Off Procedure

5.4.1 Powering Up The Anthem Generator


1. Turn the main power disconnect switch to ON.
2. On the Control Console left side, turn the power switch to ON.
Within a few seconds, the LCD display illuminates, and the control console
runs a brief system self test. During the test, you see:

Anthem rating (max kW - max mA


Software dates (C) Console (I) Inverter (D)
Development
capacity in kW
selected tube
-------- Options Installed --------
AEC
APR
Bucky AEC Wall
Bucky AEC Table

When self test finishes, the display defaults to the mode of operation selected
at the time of installation. The system is now ready for use.

5.4.2 Powering Down the Anthem Generator


1. On the Control Console left side, turn the power switch to OFF.
If the generator will not be used for an extended period, set the main power
disconnect switch to OFF.

5.5 Operating Modes


The Anthem can be operated in the following modes:
• Manual Mode (2- or 3-point mode)
• APR Mode
• DR Mode

5.5.1 Manual Mode

Manual 2-Point Mode


In 2-point Manual Mode, you can control the kV and mAs parameters of
exposure. The Anthem generator automatically calculates mA to produce the

5-6 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

highest allowable tube current for shortest possible exposure, within


limitations of the X-ray tube.

2 POINT
80kV 12mAs 3 POINT

NO BUCKY

Figure 5-3. Manual 2-Point operator’s screen

Manual 3-Point Mode


In 3-point Manual Mode, you can select from all available exposure technique
parameters, including kV, mA, and time. Additionally, the calculated mAs of
the exposure is displayed in the center portion of the LCD screen. The
generator inhibits selections beyond the limitations of the X-ray tube.

60kV 300mA 100ms


2 POINT
3 POINT

NO BUCKY

Figure 5-4. Manual 3-Point operator’s screen

5 Operation 5-7
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Manual Mode Selections


The Manual operation mode lets you custom set the technique parameters for:
• kV (all modes)
• mAs (2 point only)
• Time (3 point only)
• mA (3 point only)
• Image receptor (Table, Wall, or No Bucky)
To modify any of these factors, press the multifunction button closest to the
name of that factor. If the function is kV, mAs, or exposure time, you can then
change the displayed value with the data knob. For IMAGE RECEPTOR,
press the associated button to toggle through the available selections. You can
modify any factor by pressing its multifunction button and continuing as
above. (For exposure procedures see “Making an Exposure” on page 5-13.)

5.5.2 APR (Anatomically Programmable Radiography)


You can select from up to 8 predefined or user-defined anatomic regions, with
up to 12 different views per region, for a total of up to 96 different pre-
programmed techniques, designed to optimize exposures for typical patient
studies. These techniques are also optimized for the rated power capability
and X-ray tube installed with the generator. APR techniques use 3-point
operation.

APR Mode Selections


You select techniques by navigating three APR menu layers. From the initial
layer, you select an anatomical region from 8 choices.

UPPER CERVICAL
EXTREMITY SPINE
AP MODE
LOWER LUMBAR
EXTREMITY SPINE
SELECT
ANATOMICAL REGION
PELVIS CHEST &
& HIP THORAX

ABDOMEN SKULL &


KUB FACIAL

Figure 5-5. Initial APR screen

5-8 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

After selecting a region, you see the available views for that region. Select a
view.

CHEST RIB ABOVE


PA DIAPHRAM

CHEST RIB BELOW


CHEST AND THORAX
LAT DIAPHRAM
SELECT A VIEW
T-SPINE STERNUM
AP RAO

T-SPINE STERNUM
LAT LAT

Figure 5-6. APR view selection screen (second level)

After selecting a view, you see the technique parameters for that region. Edit
these parameter values as you would in 3-point manual mode.

SAVE
125 kV 350 mA 70 ms TECH

24 mAs

CHEST & THORAX


CHEST PA

25cm ANODE HEAT 0%

Figure 5-7. APR view edit screen (third level)

Changing and Saving an APR Technique


Although APR mode uses only 3-point operation, you can also program
selected APR techniques to use AEC.

5 Operation 5-9
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

To save modified APR techniques, use the SAVE TECH button in the upper
right corner. (Note: You can save APR techniques only if the feature “ALLOW APR
UPDATES” was enabled during installation.)

Default Anatomical Regions and Views

Anatomi-
cal
region View of region
Upper Finger Finger Hand/ Hand/ Forearm Elbow Elbow Humerus Shoulder Trans
Extremity AP/OBL LAT Wrist AP/ Wrist LAT AP/LAT AP/OBL LAT AP/LAT AP/LAT Thoractic
OBL
Lower Toe AP/ Foot AP/ Foot LAT Ankle Ankle TIB/FIB TIB/FIB Knee LAT Knee AP/ Femur
Extremity LAT LAT AP/OBL LAT AP LAT OBL AP
Femur
LAT
Pelvis & Hip Pelvis AP Hip AP Sacrum Sacrum
Coccyx/ Coccyx/
AP LT
Abdomen Abdo- Abdo- KUB AP/
KUB men AP men OBL
Upright
Cervical AP Odontoid Lateral/ Swimmer
Spine Oblique
Lumbar Spine AP Oblique Lateral L5-S1
Spot
Chest & Tho- Chest AP Chest T-Spine T-Spine Rib Rib Sternum Sternum
rax LAT AP LAT Above Below RAO LAT
Dia- Dia-
phragm phragm

Skull & Facial AP/PA or Skull Skull Skull LAT Facial Waters Facial
Caldwell Towne SMU AP/PA LAT
Base

Table 5-1. Standard list of anatomical regions and views

5-10 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5.5.3 AEC (Automatic Exposure Control)


If your Anthem generator has the AEC option and is connected to an
ionization chamber, you can use the AEC feature in either the Manual mode
or APR mode. With AEC activated, you set additional parameters with the
multifunction buttons on the right-side column, described below.
The AEC feature takes full control of exposure timing. Thus, you cannot
manually set a time value in 3-point operation, nor can you set an mAs value
in 2-point operation or in APR mode.

To activate AEC, press the AEC ( ) button. You see new parameters in the
right-side column.

2 POINT
80kV 12mAs 3 POINT

375ms
BKUP

NO BUCKY 1.2

600

Figure 5-8. AEC Mode operator’s screen

For exposure procedures, see “Making an Exposure” on page 5-13. When the
exposure is complete, the display shows the actual mAs and elapsed time of
the exposure.

5 Operation 5-11
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Right column AEC buttons

Symbol/Text Description
Back Up
375ms This button lets you set the time backup value with the data
BKUP knob. Set this to approximately 2 to 3 times the expected mAs
for the selected kV.

Film Density
This button lets you set the optical density on the finished
1.2
radiograph. You can select changes in density, ranging from
0.8 to 2.0, with the data knob.
When you select a film speed value (below), this field shows
the value that was used during calibration, and is your “zero”
point.
Ion Chamber Fields
This button lets you select chamber field combinations for a 3-
field ionization chamber by toggling this button.

Film/Screen Selection
This button gives you a choice of different film-screen combi-
600
nation speeds, or CR (Computed Radiography). The film/
screen speeds available may vary by site and appear only if
calibrated during installation.
When you select a value, the Film Density display shows the
value that was used during calibration, and is your “zero”
point.

5.5.4 DR (Digital Radiography) Mode


When the Anthem generator is equipped for use with a DR system, you can
configure all technique settings from an external DR workstation. However,
you can also make manual adjustments at the console panel. The Control
Console and DR workstation are synchronized so that any change made at
one station is automatically displayed at the other.
Refer to the instructions provided with your DR workstation.
You use the Anthem Control Console for issuing Prep and Expose commands.

5.6 Setting Default Startup Parameters


You can set startup default techniques with the following procedure:
1. Enter Administrator Mode. To do this, press and hold the left-most
bottom-row button, and while holding this button, turn on the console
power switch.

5-12 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

You see the Administrator Mode Menu.

DEFAULT 3PT KV 3PT MA 3PT TIME


STARTUP DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT
2 PT 40 100 0.04

2PT KV
DEFAULT
40
2PT MAS IMAGE
DEFAULT DEFAULT
1.0 NONE
SET AN OPTION
DEFAULT
CONTRAST
70

FLASH SET
OPTIONS CLOCK

EXIT

Figure 5-9. Administrative Mode screen

2. You can now program default settings for the parameters shown in
Figure 5-9 and described in “Operator Control Console” on page 5-2.
To exit this screen and save your changes, press EXIT. The generator completes
its power-up sequence and reboots to the new default settings.

Note: There is no default setting for the FLASH OPTIONS, which also appears in the
Service Mode menu. You use this option to transfer APR user settings to or from a
PC. If APR is not installed, you do not see FLASH OPTIONS.

5.7 Making an Exposure


Daily X-Ray Tube Seasoning
Before making exposures, follow the X-ray tube manufacturer’s warm-up
(seasoning) procedure. If the unit has been idle for more than three hours, you
must slowly warm the tube anode target before use. This will extend the
useful life of the tube.

X-ray Tube ANODE HEAT Display


The Anthem generator automatically calculates X-ray tube anode heat loading
and, during an exposure, displays the ANODE HEAT value as a percentage of
maximum kilo heat units (kHU).

5 Operation 5-13
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5.7.1 Prep and Expose in 2-Point Manual Mode

1. Verify or change to manual mode by pressing the button. If the


hand symbol is not showing, manual mode is already selected.
2. Select the Manual 2-Point mode by pressing the right top row button until
2 POINT is highlighted.
3. Verify or change the kV and/or mAs settings by pressing their respective
buttons and using the data knob to adjust the setting.
4. Handswitch: Press the upper button until it is flush with the lower button.*
Footswitch: Step down until you hear a click and/or feel some resistance.*
Console: Press and hold down the prep button.
5. When the green READY light turns on:
Handswitch: Pres the button (both levels) completely in.*
Footswitch: Step down completely.*
Console: Continue pressing the prep button and press and hold the expose
button.
When you start the exposure, the yellow EXPOSE light goes on and you hear a
tone for the duration of the exposure.
6. Continue to hold down the switch or both buttons until the EXPOSE light
goes off and the tone stops.
* When using a handswitch or footswitch with the Anthem, you can press all the way
into the second position and wait for the exposure to complete. A generator automatic
timer waits the proper period before entering EXPOSE mode.

Note: If you release either of the two buttons during an exposure, the exposure
terminates and you see a BUTTON FAULT error message.

Fault Indication
If a fault occurs in your system, you see a fault condition message on the
screen. See Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting”.

5.7.2 Prep and Expose in 3-Point Manual Mode

1. Verify or change to manual mode by pressing the button. If the


hand symbol is not showing, manual mode is already selected.
2. Select the Manual 3-Point mode by pressing the right top row button until
3 POINT is highlighted.
3. Verify or change the kV, mA and/or time settings by pressing their
respective buttons and using the data knob to adjust the setting.

5-14 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Handswitch: Press the upper button until it is flush with the lower button.*
Footswitch: Step down until you hear a click and/or feel some resistance.*
Console: Press and hold down the prep button.
5. When the green READY light turns on:
Handswitch: Pres the button (both levels) completely in.*
Footswitch: Step down completely.*
Console: Continue pressing the prep button and press and hold the expose
button.
When you start the exposure, the yellow EXPOSE light goes on and you hear a
tone for the duration of the exposure.
6. Continue to hold down the switch or both buttons until the EXPOSE light
goes off and the tone stops.
* When using a handswitch or footswitch with the Anthem, you can press all the way
into the second position and wait for the exposure to complete. A generator automatic
timer waits the proper period before entering EXPOSE mode.

Note: If you release either of the two buttons during an exposure, the exposure
terminates and you see a BUTTON FAULT error message.

Fault Indication
If a fault occurs in your system, you see a fault condition message on the
screen. See Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting”.

5.7.3 Prep and Expose in APR Mode

1. Select the APR Mode by pressing the button. If the APR symbol is not
showing, APR mode is already selected.
2. Change or verify thickness by pressing the respective button and use the
data knob to adjust the thickness.
3. Change or verify patient size by repeatedly pressing the respective button
to toggle between small, medium or large patient.
4. Handswitch: Press the upper button until it is flush with the lower button.*
Footswitch: Step down until you hear a click and/or feel some resistance.*
Console: Press and hold down the prep button.
5. When the green READY light turns on:
Handswitch: Pres the button (both levels) completely in.*
Footswitch: Step down completely.*

5 Operation 5-15
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Console: Continue pressing the prep button and press and hold the expose
button.
When you start the exposure, the yellow EXPOSE light goes on and you hear a
tone for the duration of the exposure.
6. Continue to hold down the switch or both buttons until the EXPOSE light
goes off and the tone stops.
* When using a handswitch or footswitch with the Anthem, you can press all the way
into the second position and wait for the exposure to complete. A generator automatic
timer waits the proper period before entering EXPOSE mode.

Note: If you release either of the two buttons during an exposure, the exposure
terminates and you see a BUTTON FAULT error message.

Fault Indication
If a fault occurs in your system, you see a fault condition message on the
screen. See Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting”.

5.7.4 Prep and Expose in AEC Mode


1. Handswitch: Press the upper button until it is flush with the lower button.*
Footswitch: Step down until you hear a click and/or feel some resistance.*
Console: Press and hold down the prep button.
2. When the green READY light turns on:
Handswitch: Pres the button (both levels) completely in.*
Footswitch: Step down completely.*
Console: Continue pressing the prep button and press and hold the expose
button.
When you start the exposure, the yellow EXPOSE light goes on and you hear a
tone for the duration of the exposure.
3. Continue to hold down the switch or both buttons until the EXPOSE light
goes off and the tone stops.
* When using a handswitch or footswitch with the Anthem, you can press all the way
into the second position and wait for the exposure to complete. A generator automatic
timer waits the proper period before entering EXPOSE mode.

Note: If you release either of the two buttons during an exposure, the exposure
terminates and you see a BUTTON FAULT error message.

Fault Indication
If a fault occurs in your system, you see a fault condition message on the
screen. See Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting”.

5-16 5 Operation
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5.8 Generator Exposure Tables


Table 5-2 to Table 5-4 shows mAs values resulting from preselected exposure
time and mA values.

5 Operation 5-17
5-18
TIME mA Selected
ms 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700
10 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00
11 1.10 1.65 2.20 2.75 3.30 3.85 4.40 4.95 5.50 6.05 6.60 7.15 7.70
12 1.20 1.80 2.40 3.00 3.60 4.20 4.80 5.40 6.00 6.60 7.20 7.80 8.40

5 Operation
13 1.30 1.95 2.60 3.25 3.90 4.55 5.20 5.85 6.50 7.15 7.80 8.45 9.10
15 1.13 1.50 2.25 3.00 3.75 4.50 5.25 6.00 6.75 7.50 8.25 9.00 9.75 10.50
17 1.28 1.70 2.55 3.40 4.25 5.10 5.95 6.80 7.65 8.50 9.35 10.20 11.05 11.90
20 1.00 1.50 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00
22 1.10 1.65 2.20 3.30 4.40 5.50 6.60 7.70 8.80 9.90 11.00 12.10 13.20 14.30 15.40
25 1.25 1.88 2.50 3.75 5.00 6.25 7.50 8.75 10.00 11.25 12.50 13.75 15.00 16.25 17.50
27 1.35 2.03 2.70 4.05 5.40 6.75 8.10 9.45 10.80 12.15 13.50 14.85 16.20 17.55 18.90
30 1.50 2.25 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00 10.50 12.00 13.50 15.00 16.50 18.00 19.50 21.00
32 1.60 2.40 3.20 4.80 6.40 8.00 9.60 11.20 12.80 14.40 16.00 17.60 19.20 20.80 22.40
35 1.75 2.63 3.50 5.25 7.00 8.75 10.50 12.25 14.00 15.75 17.50 19.25 21.00 22.75 24.50
37 1.85 2.78 3.70 5.55 7.40 9.25 11.10 12.95 14.80 16.65 18.50 20.35 22.20 24.05 25.90
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

40 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 22.00 24.00 26.00 28.00
45 1.13 2.25 3.38 4.50 6.75 9.00 11.25 13.50 15.75 18.00 20.25 22.50 24.75 27.00 29.25 31.50
50 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00 22.50 25.00 27.50 30.00 32.50 35.00
55 1.38 2.75 4.13 5.50 8.25 11.00 13.75 16.50 19.25 22.00 24.75 27.50 30.25 33.00 35.75 38.50
60 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00 15.00 18.00 21.00 24.00 27.00 30.00 33.00 36.00 39.00 42.00
65 1.63 3.25 4.88 6.50 9.75 13.00 16.25 19.50 22.75 26.00 29.25 32.50 35.75 39.00 42.25 45.50
70 1.75 3.50 5.25 7.00 10.50 14.00 17.50 21.00 24.50 28.00 31.50 35.00 38.50 42.00 45.50 49.00
75 1.88 3.75 5.63 7.50 11.25 15.00 18.75 22.50 26.25 30.00 33.75 37.50 41.25 45.00 48.75 52.50
80 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 12.00 16.00 20.00 24.00 28.00 32.00 36.00 40.00 44.00 48.00 52.00 56.00
85 2.13 4.25 6.38 8.50 12.75 17.00 21.25 25.50 29.75 34.00 38.25 42.50 46.75 51.00 55.25 59.50
90 2.25 4.50 6.75 9.00 13.50 18.00 22.50 27.00 31.50 36.00 40.50 45.00 49.50 54.00 58.50 63.00

Table 5-2: mAs vs. mA and time selected (10 to 135 ms)
95 2.38 4.75 7.13 9.50 14.25 19.00 23.75 28.50 33.25 38.00 42.75 47.50 52.25 57.00 61.75 66.50
100 2.50 5.00 7.50 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00 35.00 40.00 45.00 50.00 55.00 60.00 65.00 70.00
110 2.75 5.50 8.25 11.00 16.50 22.00 27.50 33.00 38.50 44.00 49.50 55.00 60.50 66.00 71.50 77.00
120 3.00 6.00 9.00 12.00 18.00 24.00 30.00 36.00 42.00 48.00 54.00 60.00 66.00 72.00 78.00 84.00
125 3.13 6.25 9.38 12.50 18.75 25.00 31.25 37.50 43.75 50.00 56.25 62.50 68.75 75.00 81.25 87.50
130 3.25 6.50 9.75 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 39.00 45.50 52.00 58.50 65.00 71.50 78.00 84.50 91.00
135 3.38 6.75 10.13 13.50 20.25 27.00 33.75 40.50 47.25 54.00 60.75 67.50 74.25 81.00 87.75 94.50

mAs values vs. mA and time selected.


TIME mA Selected
ms 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700
140 3.5 7.0 10.5 14.0 21.0 28.0 35.0 42.0 49.0 56.0 63.0 70.0 77.0 84.0 91.0 98.0
150 3.8 7.5 11.3 15.0 22.5 30.0 37.5 45.0 52.5 60.0 67.5 75.0 82.5 90.0 97.5 105.0
165 4.1 8.3 12.4 16.5 24.8 33.0 41.3 49.5 57.8 66.0 74.3 82.5 90.8 99.0 107.3 115.5
175 4.4 8.8 13.1 17.5 26.3 35.0 43.8 52.5 61.3 70.0 78.8 87.5 96.3 105.0 113.8 122.5
180 4.5 9.0 13.5 18.0 27.0 36.0 45.0 54.0 63.0 72.0 81.0 90.0 99.0 108.0 117.0 126.0
190 4.8 9.5 14.3 19.0 28.5 38.0 47.5 57.0 66.5 76.0 85.5 95.0 104.5 114.0 123.5 133.0
200 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0 120.0 130.0 140.0
225 5.6 11.3 16.9 22.5 33.8 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101.3 112.5 123.8 135.0 146.3 157.5
250 6.3 12.5 18.8 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 137.5 150.0 162.5 175.0
275 6.9 13.8 20.6 27.5 41.3 55.0 68.8 82.5 96.3 110.0 123.8 137.5 151.3 165.0 178.8 192.5
300 7.5 15.0 22.5 30.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 90.0 105.0 120.0 135.0 150.0 165.0 180.0 195.0 210.0
325 8.1 16.3 24.4 32.5 48.8 65.0 81.3 97.5 113.8 130.0 146.3 162.5 178.8 195.0 211.3 227.5
350 8.8 17.5 26.3 35.0 52.5 70.0 87.5 105.0 122.5 140.0 157.5 175.0 192.5 210.0 227.5 245.0
375 9.4 18.8 28.1 37.5 56.3 75.0 93.8 112.5 131.3 150.0 168.8 187.5 206.3 225.0 243.8 262.5
400 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0 140.0 160.0 180.0 200.0 220.0 240.0 260.0 280.0
450 11.3 22.5 33.8 45.0 67.5 90.0 112.5 135.0 157.5 180.0 202.5 225.0 247.5 270.0 292.5 315.0
500 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 175.0 200.0 225.0 250.0 275.0 300.0 325.0 350.0
550 13.8 27.5 41.3 55.0 82.5 110.0 137.5 165.0 192.5 220.0 247.5 275.0 302.5 330.0 357.5 385.0
600 15.0 30.0 45.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 150.0 180.0 210.0 240.0 270.0 300.0 330.0 360.0 390.0 420.0
675 16.9 33.8 50.6 67.5 101.3 135.0 168.8 202.5 236.3 270.0 303.8 337.5 371.3 405.0 438.8 472.5
700 17.5 35.0 52.5 70.0 105.0 140.0 175.0 210.0 245.0 280.0 315.0 350.0 385.0 420.0 455.0 490.0
750 18.8 37.5 56.3 75.0 112.5 150.0 187.5 225.0 262.5 300.0 337.5 375.0 412.5 450.0 487.5 525.0
800 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 120.0 160.0 200.0 240.0 280.0 320.0 360.0 400.0 440.0 480.0 520.0 560.0
825 20.6 41.3 61.9 82.5 123.8 165.0 206.3 247.5 288.8 330.0 371.3 412.5 453.8 495.0 536.3 577.5
900 22.5 45.0 67.5 90.0 135.0 180.0 225.0 270.0 315.0 360.0 405.0 450.0 495.0 540.0 585.0
950 23.8 47.5 71.3 95.0 142.5 190.0 237.5 285.0 332.5 380.0 427.5 475.0 522.5 570.0

Table 5-3: mAs vs. mA and time selected (140 to 1660 ms)
1000 25.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 450.0 500.0 550.0 600.0
1120 28.0 56.0 84.0 112.0 168.0 224.0 280.0 336.0 392.0 448.0 504.0 560.0
1250 31.3 62.5 93.8 125.0 187.5 250.0 312.5 375.0 437.5 500.0 562.5
1370 34.3 68.5 102.8 137.0 205.5 274.0 342.5 411.0 479.5 548.0
1500 37.5 75.0 112.5 150.0 225.0 300.0 375.0 450.0 525.0 600.0
1660 41.5 83.0 124.5 166.0 249.0 332.0 415.0 498.0 581.0

mAs values vs. mA and time selected.

5 Operation
5-19
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual
5-20
5 Operation
TIME mA Selected
ms 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700
1750 43.8 87.5 131.3 175.0 262.5 350.0 437.5 525.0
1875 46.9 93.8 140.6 187.5 281.3 375.0 468.8 562.5
2000 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 600.0
2250 56.3 112.5 168.8 225.0 337.5 450.0 562.5
2500 62.5 125.0 187.5 250.0 375.0 500.0
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2750 68.8 137.5 206.3 275.0 412.5 550.0


3000 75.0 150.0 225.0 300.0 450.0 600.0
3500 87.5 175.0 262.5 350.0 525.0
4000 100.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 600.0
4500 112.5 225.0 337.5 450.0
5000 125.0 250.0 375.0 500.0
5500 137.5 275.0 412.5 550.0
6000 150.0 300.0 450.0 600.0

mAs values vs. mA and time selected.

Table 5-4: mAs vs. mA and time selected (1750 to 6000 ms)
6 Periodic Maintenance

Periodic Maintenance
6
6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance procedures for the Anthem X-ray generator, performed by
qualified service personnel, are required within 30 days after installation and
every 6 months thereafter. Service personnel must be specifically trained and
experienced with medical X-ray apparatus. Applicable preventive
maintenance or any repair service should be performed only by these skilled
individuals. These procedures are contained in the Anthem Generator
Installation, Operation and Service Manual (this manual).
Refer to “Periodic Maintenance Schedule” on page 6-1 for information on
when to perform periodic maintenance on the generator.

Note: This piece of X-ray equipment contains operating safeguards to insure


maximum safety. Aside from routine maintenance, any abnormal noise, vibration or
unusual performance should be reported to and investigated by a qualified service
engineer. Before requesting service, however, be sure the equipment is being operated
according to instructions in the Anthem Generator Installation, Operation and
Service Manual (this manual).

Warning
The main capacitor bank (located on the left side of the Power
Module) contains a very high charge when power is applied. This
charge is a fatal shock hazard. Never perform any service or
maintenance inside the generator without first performing the
“Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2. Check the capacitor bank for zero
volts with a DC voltmeter before working on any internal circuitry.

While working with electro-mechanical equipment, exercise normal caution


and care. Before removing or opening any electrical power panels or covers,
verify that the incoming power supply is turned OFF.

6 Periodic Maintenance 6-1


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
If maintenance procedures require power to be applied to the unit,
exercise extreme care to insure the safety of service and others in the
area. Always verify that the equipment is properly grounded before
attempting any electrical operation or adjustment.

Warning
Certain tests require the production of X-rays. Take precautions to
ensure your safety and the safety of others in close proximity. Observe
the following minimum precautions:
- wear lead aprons
- personnel remaining in the X-ray room during exposure must
be behind a lead shield
- minimize radiation scatter through doorways, walls and floor

Note: Due to varying operating conditions, the following procedures might need to
be performed at greater or lesser intervals. Set these intervals according to your
generator’s performance.

6.1.1 Discharge Procedure


When performing maintenance, repair, or service on the generator that
requires you to open the upper or lower cabinet, always ensure the unit is
discharged. Discharge the generator as follows:
1. Enter Service Mode. To do this, press and hold the second-from-left
bottom-row button, and while holding this button, turn on the console
power switch.
When the Control Console boots up, you are prompted for a password. It
shows the default password of 0000.
2. With 0000 displayed, press OK.
If your password is not 0000, use the top-row multifunction buttons and
the data knob to select the correct password digits, then press OK.
You see the Service Mode Menu.

6-2 6 Periodic Maintenance


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. Press the CALIBRATE button (1 in Figure 6-1).

Figure 6-1. Calibrate button

4. Press the DISCHARGE CAPS button (1 in Figure 6-2).

Figure 6-2. Discharge Caps button

5. Take five exposures. (Note: This step sends voltage to the tube, but does not
recharge the capacitors.)
6. Open the upper cabinet and measure the voltage across the terminals (1 in
Figure 6-3) at capacitor C1 (Figure 6-3). If voltage is 10 VDC or higher, take
two more exposures and then verify voltage across the bus again.

6 Periodic Maintenance 6-3


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

7. When the voltage is below 10 VDC, continue with the maintenance/


repair/service work on the generator.

3-Phase C1 Single Phase

Figure 6-3. Capacitor C1

6.1.2 Maintenance Schedule


What to Do When to Do It Refer to Section
Clean External Surfaces. Every Week or as “Cleaning External Surfaces” on
Required page 6-5.
Inspect Electrical Cabling. Every 6 Months “Inspecting Electrical Cabling” on
page 6-6.
Inspect and Re-grease HT Every 6 Months “Inspecting and Re-Greasing the
Cables. HT Cables” on page 6-6.
Verify Tube Insert. Every 6 Months “Verifying the Tube Insert” on
page 6-7.
Inspect Connections. Every 6 Months “Inspecting Connections” on
page 6-7.
Verify Accuracy of kV, mAs Every 6 Months “Verifying the Accuracy of kV,
and mA. mAs and mA” on page 6-8.
Inspect Electromechanical Every 6 Months “Inspecting Electromechanical
Connectors. Contactors” on page 6-10.
Check High Voltage Trans- Every 6 Months “Inspecting the High Voltage
former. Transformer” on page 6-10.
Check Audible and Visual Every 6 Months “Checking Audible and Visual
Exposure Indicators. Exposure Indicators” on
page 6-11.
Inspect Fasteners for Tight- Every 6 Months “Inspecting Fasteners for Tight-
ness. ness” on page 6-12.
Calibrate AEC (Option) Every 6 months “AEC Calibration Procedure” on
page 3-18
Table 6-1. Periodic Maintenance Schedule

6-4 6 Periodic Maintenance


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

6.2 Cleaning External Surfaces


Of the procedures listed in Table 6-1 on page 6-4, all tasks except for the top
row (cleaning) must be performed by only qualified personnel. To clean the
Anthem, use the following guidelines.

Tools Required
• cleaning wipes
• non-abrasive, hospital-grade cleaner
Use cleaning wipes and non-abrasive, hospital-grade cleaner to clean external
surfaces of the generator.

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Warning
This equipment is NOT classified as anaesthetic-proof and may ignite
inflammable anesthetics. Flammable agents used for skin cleaning or
disinfecting may also produce an explosion hazard.

• Ensure the power has been disconnected and that the emergency switches
have been activated, before starting any cleaning operation.
• Ensure no liquid gets into the unit.
• Do not immerse the equipment, including any components or accessories,
in liquid.
• Do not autoclave the equipment, including any component or accessories.
• Do not use water. Water can short-circuit the electrical installation and
cause corrosion to mechanical parts.
• Do not use acid or abrasive products.
• Use only a dry cloth to clean chrome-plated parts.
• Only the surface areas of unit parts, including accessories and connection
cables, should be disinfected using a gaseous disinfectant.
• Clean painted parts with a cloth and products appropriate for cleaning
plastic materials; after cleaning wipe the surfaces with a clean, dry cloth.
• Do not spray cleaning or disinfection solution directly on the equipment.
To disinfect, moisten a cloth with a 70% Isopropyl alcohol solution or
equivalent and wipe the surface of the equipment.

6 Periodic Maintenance 6-5


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

• When disinfecting the examination room, ensure the unit is covered with
plastic sheets.

6.3 Inspecting Electrical Cabling


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Warning
Never perform any service or maintenance inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

• Inspect all accessible cables for fraying or abrasion. Replace if necessary.

6.4 Inspecting and Re-Greasing the HT Cables


Tools Required
• Phillips screwdriver

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Warning
Never perform any service or maintenance inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

6-6 6 Periodic Maintenance


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1. Open the lower cabinet front panel.


2. Remove the high tension cables, and clean and re-grease them with vapor-
proof compound.
3. Reinsert the high tension jacks into federal receptacles. Insure the cables
are well seated and their pins make good contact. Carefully spread the
pins with a pocketknife if necessary, and re-seat the cables.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 on the tube end of the cables.

6.5 Verifying the Tube Insert


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Warning
Never perform any service or maintenance inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Verify that insert of tube matches tube insert selected in the system
installation file. If it does not, call Del Medical Technical Support.

6.6 Inspecting Connections


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

6 Periodic Maintenance 6-7


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Warning
Never perform any service or maintenance inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Open the power module front panel.


2. Inspect for loose or corroded connections. Refit or replace if needed.
3. Inspect all circuit boards and wiring harness plugs to assure they are all
well seated in their proper receptacles.

6.7 Verifying the Accuracy of kV, mAs and mA


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)
• dual-trace storage oscilloscope (recommended)
• digital multimeter (minimum requirement)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

6-8 6 Periodic Maintenance


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
Never perform any service or maintenance inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Make sure that the Main disconnect is OFF.


2. Connect channel 1 and 2 on the oscilloscope as listed below. All test points
(TP) are on the Main Control board.

Channel Probe Ground lead


1 to TP6A (kV) TP22A
2 to TP47A (mA) to TP22B

Oscilloscope settings
3. Set the oscilloscope as follows:

Channel #1
Vertical 2 V/div.
Horizontal 10 ms/div.
Mode Normal Sweep
Trigger Channel 1 - Positive

Channel #2
Vertical 1 V/div.
Horizontal 10 ms/div.
Mode Normal Sweep

Note: If you are performing calibration using only a scope, read the values of kV
and mA as follows:

From Channel #1:


For kV: 1 V = 20 kV

From Channel #2:


For mA, small spot: 1 V = 20 mA
For mA, Large spot: 1 V = 100 mA
4. In 3-point mode, set kV=75, mA=200, and ms=50.

Warning
When taking exposures for test and/or verification purposes, follow
the site’s specific safety routines and regulations.

6 Periodic Maintenance 6-9


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5. Take a test exposure and verify that the kV is within ± 5% of indicated


value and the mA is within ± 10% of indicated value). If either kV or mA
are outside the range, perform calibrations per “Calibration Procedure” on
page 3-1.

6.8 Inspecting Electromechanical Contactors


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Warning
Never perform any service or maintenance inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Inspect the electromechanical contactors and relays for pitting, poor


contact, loose or missing parts.
2. If necessary, reconnect, retighten or replace components.

6.9 Inspecting the High Voltage Transformer


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

6-10 6 Periodic Maintenance


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Warning
Never perform any maintenance, inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Check the transformer oil level. Oil is at proper level when it reaches the
horizontal level pin (Figure 6-4) in the circular window. To replenish
transformer oil, unscrew the four screws holding the circular window, and
fill with Shell Diala Oil AX only. The oil level must not be above the top of
the horizontal level pin.

Oil Level
Window

Figure 6-4. Oil level inspection window

2. Inspect the electrical and mechanical connections of the transformer.


Clean and tighten as necessary.

6.10 Checking Audible and Visual Exposure Indicators


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

6 Periodic Maintenance 6-11


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Proceed as follows to confirm that the audible indicator which indicates an X-


ray exposure, and visual indicator, which indicates the production of X-rays,
are functioning correctly.
1. Choose any techniques.

Warning
When taking exposures for test and/or verification purposes make
sure to follow the specific safety routines and regulations on site.

2. Press and hold down the prep button.


3. When the green READY light turns on, continue holding down the prep
button and press and hold the expose button.
When you start the exposure, the yellow EXPOSE light goes on and you hear a
tone for the duration of the exposure.
4. Continue to hold down both buttons until the EXPOSE light goes off and
the tone stops.
If the controls behave differently from what is mentioned in step 3 and 4, refer
to the Troubleshooting section of this manual.

6.11 Inspecting Fasteners for Tightness


Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

6-12 6 Periodic Maintenance


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
Never perform any maintenance inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Inspect each exposed fastener for tightness and tighten accordingly.

6 Periodic Maintenance 6-13


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

6-14 6 Periodic Maintenance


7 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
7
7.1 Introduction
This chapter contains troubleshooting tables and charts that guide you
through most of the problems that may be related to the generator. Included
are also status/error messages along with possible solution(s) to the error.
Because of the complex nature of some error conditions, part replacements
recommended in this chapter are not guaranteed to be the singular solution to
a problem.

Warning
All service and maintenance including the procedures in this chapter,
must be performed by qualified service personnel only.

7.2 Discharge Procedure


Whenever you are performing maintenance, repair, or service on the
generator that requires you to open the upper or lower cabinet, you must
always make sure the unit is discharged. Discharge the generator according to
“Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Warning
Never perform any service or maintenance inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

7.3 Troubleshooting Tables and Procedures


This chapter contains tables for quick reference to trouble conditions and error
messages. Following the tables are detailed procedures, graphics, and charts,
for issues requiring more in-depth troubleshooting.
Note: Before beginning troubleshooting check all DC power supply voltages as
described in “Board and Test Point Locations” on page 2-35.

7 Troubleshooting 7-1
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

7.4 Console Error Messages


Console error messages appear in the lower center of the console screen’s
display portion. See Figure 7-1.

Error Message
Location

Figure 7-1. Console error message location

Backup mAs Term


Problem Description
(AEC-only systems) The exposure reached the AEC programmed backup time/
mAs and was terminated by the generator. Pointing the beam at an
“unselected” receptor also causes this error message.
Corrective Action
Note: An oscilloscope and a multimeter are required to troubleshoot this fault.
1. Confirm that the AEC settings have adequate backup time/mAs values
appropriate for the their specific anatomy and patient size. Improper kV
and mA factors directly affect exposure time/mAs during AEC exposures.
AEC settings can be set manually if needed.
2. Confirm proper patient positioning and correct collimation.
3. Confirm the APR parameters are programmed to select the correct
receptor and ion chamber cell(s). For APR settings management, see
“Managing the APR Database” on page 3-10.
4. If the message occurs for both table and wall chambers: Measure the AEC +/-12
VDC supply and the AEC reference voltage on the Main Control board.
a. On the Power Relay board, measure TP12 (-12 VDC) and TP13 (+12
VDC) referenced to TP1 GND. Also, on the Main Control board,
measure TP306 (-12 VDC) and TP305 (+12 VDC) referenced to TP22C
GND.
b. Measure the AEC reference voltage.

7-2 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5. (If the message occurs for both table and wall chambers) Measure the AEC
reference voltage on the Main Control board:
a. Select Wall AEC
b. Connect a DVM to TP302, and reference TP22C.
c. Increase the kVp selection, and verify that the reference voltage
decreases. You typically see approximately 2 VDC at 40 kV and
approximately 0.8 VDC at 125 kV. If this voltage is considerably out of
range, not present, or does not change with changes in kVp, replace the
Main Control board (“Replacing the Main Control Board” on
page 8-15).
d. Select Table AEC.
e. Connect a DVM to TP303, and reference TP22C.
a. Increase the kVp selection, and verify that the reference voltage
decreases. You typically see approximately 2 VDC at 40 kV and
approximately 0.8 VDC at 125 kV. If this voltage is considerably out of
range, not present, or does not change with changes in kVp, replace the
Main Control board (“Replacing the Main Control Board” on
page 8-15).
6. To measure wallstand ion chamber output ramp performance, connect an
oscilloscope and set parameters as follows:
Note: If possible remove the grid, or be aware that the grid will have an effect on
the angle of the ramp and the elapsed mAs. Select a technique that will result in at
least 10 – 20 mAs
a. Set up channel 1 (ion chamber output ramp): 1V/div, 10ms/div, probe
on Main Control board JP300, pin 1 (see Figure 3-17 on page 3-20),
referenced to TP22C.
b. Set up channel 2 (attenuated ramp): 1V/div, 10ms/div, probe on Main
Control board TP300 (see Figure 3-17 on page 3-20), referenced to
TP22C
c. Make an AEC exposure.

Ensure both ramps are linear and free of any noise. Verify that the
attenuated ramp is not be more than 50% of the ramp signal coming
from the ion chamber.
7. To measure table ion chamber output ramp performance, connect an
oscilloscope and set parameters as follows:
Note: If possible remove the grid, or be aware that the grid will have an effect on
the angle of the ramp and the elapsed mAs. Select a technique that will result in at
least 10 – 20 mAs
a. Set up channel 1 (ion chamber output ramp): 1V/div, 10ms/div, probe
on Main Control board JP300, pin 4 (see Figure 3-17 on page 3-20),
referenced to TP22C.

7 Troubleshooting 7-3
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

b. Set up channel 2 (attenuated ramp): 1V/div, 10ms/div, probe on Main


Control board TP301 (see Figure 3-17 on page 3-20), referenced to
TP22C
c. Make an AEC exposure.

Ensure both ramps are linear and free of any noise. Verify that the
attenuated ramp is not be more than 50% of the ramp signal coming
from the ion chamber.
8. If the ramp signals are present, clean and linear, perform the procedure
“AEC Calibration Procedure” on page 3-18.
9. If any attenuated ramp signals are more than 50% of the ramp signal
coming from the ion chamber, perform the procedure “AEC Calibration
Procedure” on page 3-18.
If you suspect gain pots P1 and/or P2 on the Main Control board must be
reset, perform the following procedures for centering these pots.
Centering the P2 Gain Potentiometer
1. With power OFF, move the jumper on JP300 to pins 1 and 2 (to the right
side; see Figure 7-2).

JP300
4 3 2 1

Figure 7-2. JP300 jumper pin numbering

2. Turn the Anthem power ON.


3. Measure the voltage between TP22C (GND) and TP304 and record this
voltage. Move the positive meter lead to TP300.
4. Adjust P2 until the voltage between at TP300 equals the voltage recorded
at TP304.
5. Set the jumper on JP300 back to pins 2 and 3 (center position).
Centering the P1 Gain Potentiometer
1. With power OFF, move the jumper on JP300 to pins 3 and 4 (to the left
side; see Figure 7-2).
2. Turn power ON
3. Measure voltage between TP22C (GND) and TP304 and record this
voltage. Move the positive meter lead to TP301.

7-4 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Adjust P1 until the voltage between at TP301 equals the voltage recorded
at TP304.
5. P1 pot is now centered.
6. Set the jumper on JP300 back to pins 2 and 3 (center position).

Button Fault
Problem Description
This message can occur with early releases of any of the "in use" exposure
switches, e.g., console switch, hand switch or foot switch. When Button Fault
appears, an elapsed mAs value is also displayed. This is the total accumulated
output mAs read by the generator before the Button Fault occurred.
Note: A Button Fault can also occur if the Bucky interlock signal is not seen by the
generator within 7 seconds after the exposure switch is pressed. See also: “Table
Bucky Not Rdy” on page 7-38 and “Wall Bucky Not Rdy” on page 7-38.
Corrective Actions
1. Inspect the handswitch or footswitch connection at the rear of the console,
J11. See Figure 2-30 on page 2-29, and Figure 7-3 / Figure 7-4.
2. Inspect the internal console connection to the panel PREP and EXPOSE
switches, J10. See Figure 7-4, or the schematic on page 9-12
Note: See also “Table Bucky Not Rdy” on page 7-38 or “Wall Bucky Not Rdy” on
page 7-38.

PREP/EXPOSE Handswitch/Footswitch
Button Connector J10 Connector J11

Figure 7-3. PREP/EXPOSE button connector location, console rear

7 Troubleshooting 7-5
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Handswitch

Footswitch

Console Board Detail

Figure 7-4. PREP/EXPOSE handswitch/footswitch details

Collimator Error
Problem Description
The collimator interlock is not satisfied.
Corrective Action
Inspect the collimator connections at the collimator and at the Room Interface
board. See “Collimator Interlock and Door Interlock Connections” on
page 2-24.
If a manual collimator is installed, ensure a jumper is placed in the proper
position.
If an automatic collimator is installed, ensure the wiring, setup, and
calibration are complete and correct

Comm. Error
Problem Description
Communication between the Power Module and the console has been lost.
Possible causes include:
• Console cable disconnected or failed
• Main Control board failure
• Power Relay board failure

7-6 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

• IPM Driver board failure


• Console Control board
Corrective Action
To determine if a failed board is causing this error, perform the tests below.
Refer to wiring diagrams in Chapter 9, “Electrical Schematics” and “Test
Points” on page 7-41 for test points, waveforms, and voltages.
1. Inspect and reseat the console cable connectors at both ends.
2. On the Power Relay board, verify that LED 4 (-15 VDC present) is lit.
If LED 4 is not lit, go to Step 3.
If LED 4 is lit but only faintly, go to Step 4.
If LED 4 is fully lit, go to Step 5.
3. (LED 4 not lit) Measure the voltage between TP1 and TP5.
a. If the voltage is significantly lower than 12 VDC, replace the Power
Relay board (see “Replacing the Power Relay Board” on page 8-13).
b. If the voltage is nominally 12 VDC, power down the Anthem and
disconnect the Main Control board J13A header from the Power Relay
board TB13A connector. See Figure 7-5.

J13A and TB13A

Main Control Board Power Relay Board


Figure 7-5. Main Control board J13A and Power Relay board TB13A

c. Restore power to the Anthem.


If LED 4 still does not light, replace the Power Relay board (see
“Replacing the Power Relay Board” on page 8-13).
If LED 4 lights, contact your service representative.
4. (LED4 lit faintly) If LED 4 is lit but only faintly, on the Main Control board
disconnect J3 (ribbon cable between the Main Control board and the IPM
Driver board).

7 Troubleshooting 7-7
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

If LED 4 becomes brighter, replace the IPM Driver board (see “Replacing
the IPM Driver Board” on page 8-17).
If LED 4 remains dimly lit, go to Step 5.
5. (LED 4 fully lit) Measure the voltage between TP23 and TP15. It should be
5 VDC.
a. If the TP23-to-TP15 voltage is not 5 VDC, measure the voltage between
TP21 and TP22. It should be 12 VDC.
b. If the TP21-to-TP22 voltage is not 12 VDC, replace the Main Control
board (see “Replacing the Main Control Board” on page 8-15).
If the voltage is 12 VDC, go to Step 6.
6. If all of the previous steps has been completed and no failures were found
on any of the 3 boards listed, swap out the Console Control board.

Config Flash Flt


Problem Description
System memory has become corrupted, possibly during a software update.
Corrective Action
To clear this condition, you must restore memory to the factory default.
Note: This will reset all calibration data, tube selection data, and AEC settings to
default values, but will not affect APR user settings.
1. Enter Service Mode. See “The Service Mode Menu” on page 2-40.
If you are unable to enter Service Mode, replace the Console Control
board.
2. Select CALIBRATE.
3. Select BURN FAC DFTS
4. Exit Service Mode and let the console reboot.
5. If the Config Flash Flt persists after reloading the factory defaults, replace
the Main Control board (see “Replacing the Main Control Board” on
page 8-15).

Door Open
Problem Description
The door interlock is not satisfied.
Corrective Action
If a door switch is installed in the X-Ray room, ensure the door is closed prior
to making an exposure.

7-8 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

If the door is closed, inspect the door connections. See “Collimator Interlock
and Door Interlock Connections” on page 2-24.

Exceed Prep Time


Problem Description
The rotor is in a boost state for more than 10 seconds. This may be a user error,
a failure of the console prep switch, or an intermittent failure of an external
prep input such as a hand switch or faulty foot switch.
Note: If the Anthem detects an active Prep signal during the boot-up/turn-on
sequence, you see the error “No Fil Fault” on page 7-28.
Corrective Action
1. Verify all external prep and exposure switches (e.g., hand switch,
footswitch) are in good operating condition.
2. Disconnect the switches and use an Ohmmeter to measure open and
closed conditions. If any of the readings are marginal, replace the switch.
3. If all switches test good and the message persists, replace the Console
Prep/Exposure board.

Exceeds Heat Limit


Problem Description
The selected pre-exposure parameter values (kV, mA and time) will result in
the accumulated anode heat units (kHU) to be above the maximum rated limit
for the tube. The accumulated heat unit value is displayed as a percentage at
the bottom of the LCD display.
Corrective Action
1. Allow the tube cool. The accumulated anode heat percentage counts down
while the generator is in a stand-by state.
2. Refer to the manufacturer's tube manual for anode heat characteristics and
cooling time information.
If this error message is displayed frequently, an applications evaluation may
be required, as follows:
1. Check the programmed technique factors within the APR data base.
Technique factors should be customized or edited per view according to
the specific receptor such as film, CR, or DR.
2. It may be necessary to re-evaluate the output power of the X-ray generator
and/or the X-ray tube. The generator/tube (kHU) combination might not
be appropriate for the type of practice or patient volume.

7 Troubleshooting 7-9
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Exceeds Limit
Description
The currently selected technique parameter, such kV, mA or time/mAs, is
adjusted to the minimum or maximum of its range, but combined settings are
still within the generator or tube limits. You see this informational message if
you attempt to adjust the parameter beyond its range.

Exceeds Tube Limit


Problem Description
The selected combination of kV, mA or time/mAs has exceeded the
programmed tube ratings. Exposures are inhibited during this tube-protection
message.
Corrective Action
1. Reduce the kV, mA or time/mAs value.
2. Refer to the tube manufactures manual for maximum tube rating charts.
Note: When setting up AEC techniques, the selected back-up mAs/time is
interpreted as actual exposure time. If this message appears, you may need to reduce
the amount of the back-up time/mAs for that view.

Fil DAC Fault


Problem Description
Normally, the DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) receives a digital input
from the Main Control CPU, and outputs a corresponding analog voltage.
This DAC voltage is used to establish precision reference signals for kVp
regulation, mA output, filament levels, and AEC reference.
A DAC fault occurs when the CPU's the A-to-D converter finds the analog
signal produced by the DAC manager to be out of tolerance. This is an
internal failure within the Main Control board.
Corrective Action
Replace the Main Control board (see “Replacing the Main Control Board” on
page 8-15).

Fil Hi Fault
Corrective Action
Contact your service representative.

7-10 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Fil PCB Fault


Problem Description
This fault is commonly associated with high voltage arcing. This arcing can be
associated with the tube, HT cables, the HT Tank, or a combination of two or
more of these items.
If this fault occurs at a specific kV, attempt to season the tube according to the
tube manufacturer's instructions.
Corrective Action
1. Inspect the X-Ray tube
a. Remove the collimator and look inside the port for signs of arcing.
b. Ensure the anode appears to be completely intact and doesn't show any
signs of heavy tracking, melted Tungsten, or any other signs of arcing.
c. Ensure that the port glass is clear and there is no debris present.
d. Inspect the oil for bubbles or debris floating inside the insert.
If any of these occurrences are observed, the tube is most likely arcing.
This can be confirmed if a known functional test tube is available.
Note: Some tubes use frosted glass on the insert, which makes it difficult to see
inside the tube to inspect the anode.
2. Check the HT cables. Refer to “High Tension (HT) Cable Connections” on
page 2-29.
a. Inspect the receptacles on both ends of each cable. Look for any
carbonization anywhere on the receptacles.
b. Inspect the grease inside the ports of the HT Tank and the tube, and
ensure it is adequate.
c. Inspect the HT cables.
d. Swap the HT cables with a known good set of test cables.
3. Inspect the HT Tank. Look inside the glass port to check the oil. See
“Inspection of the HT Tank” on page 2-33.

Invalid Keys
Problem Description
An invalid option key/code was entered at the control console.
Corrective Action
1. Verify the 16 digit option key code provided by Del Medical and retry the
key entry.
2. Contact Del Medical technical support or email support@delmedical.com.
Be ready to provide the following information:

7 Troubleshooting 7-11
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

• Control Console serial number


• the option key/code being rejected
3. Receive a new option key/code and retry the entry.

Inverter Flash Flt


Problem Description
System memory has become corrupted, possibly during a software update.
Corrective Action
To clear this condition, you must restore memory to the factory default.
Note: This will reset all calibration data, tube selection data, and AEC settings to
default values, but will not affect APR user settings.
1. Enter Service Mode. See “The Service Mode Menu” on page 2-40.
If you are unable to enter Service Mode, replace the Console Control
board.
2. Select CALIBRATE.
3. Select BURN FAC DFTS
4. Exit Service Mode and let the console reboot.
5. If the Config Flash Flt persists after reloading the factory defaults, replace
the Main Control board (see “Replacing the Main Control Board” on
page 8-15).

ION Chamber Flt


Problem Description
The Anthem is detecting a very low or non-existent output ramp from the ion
chamber during exposure, indicating that the ion chamber is not reporting an
accumulation of radiation. In this situation, the Anthem does not allow the
exposure to continue to the selected backup time/mAs.
Corrective Action
1. Ensure the ion chamber cable is connected to the correct connector at the
front of the generator:
• table ion chamber: J19
• wallstand ion chamber: J21
See “AEC Calibration Procedure” on page 3-18
2. If the generator is not configured for AEC or fully calibrated under a
proper film screen, perform the calibration procedure in “AEC Calibration
Procedure” on page 3-18.

7-12 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. If this error message continues to appear intermittently after the ion


chamber has been calibrated, validate the technique selection and/or the
APR data base in the area of the failure. An increase to the quality of the X-
ray beam may be needed by increasing the mA station for that view.

IPM Fault
Problem Description
One or both of the IPMs (Intelligent Power Modules) have detected a failure
or threatening condition. A voltage or current parameter has been exceeded or
a condition is detected that is potentially harmful to the IPM. Fault conditions
are not specifically specified as defined errors; all fault conditions are reported
as an IPM Fault.

Possible Causes
Over Temperature. The IPMs contain a thermal detection circuit that shuts
itself down if the internal temperature exceeds 275°F.
If this message appears during or after a heavy patient load, or at the end of
the day, over temperature is the probable cause. Turn the generator off and
allow it to cool. Automatic reset occurs around 70°F.
Investigate user technique selection for high kW settings or excessive
exposure times.
Shorted Junction on the IPM. If a short occurs between the any of the supply
terminals to the output terminals of the IPM, short-circuit protection activates.
This also typically results in a “no prep” or “no ready” condition.
Corrective Action

Warning
Ensure the DC bus is fully discharged before attempting to disconnect
or perform any maintenance on the inverter section. Bodily harm and/
or damage to inverter components may occur.

1. On each IPM, disconnect the wires on output terminals E2 and C2E1 (the 2
lower terminals). See Figure 7-6 on page 7-14.
2. On the left-side IPM, measure the resistance between upper terminal C1
and bottom output terminal C2E1. Confirm that this resistance is greater
than 1 MΩ. If it is less, replace the IPM (“Replacing an IPM Block” on
page 8-19).

7 Troubleshooting 7-13
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. On the left-side IPM, measure the resistance between middle terminal E2


and bottom output terminal C2E1. Confirm that this resistance is greater
than 1 MΩ. If it is less, replace the IPM.

C1

E2

C2E1

Figure 7-6. IPM output terminals

4. Repeat Step 2 for the right-side IPM.


5. Repeat Step 3 for the right-side IPM.
Low IPM input supply voltage. This voltage is supplied by the IPM Driver
board. If it drops below 11.5 VDC, IPM FAULT is displayed.
1. On the IPM Driver board, check the following test point voltages:

Reference Test Point Voltage Test Point Expected Voltage


TP5 TP6 +12 VDC
TP10 TP9 +15 VDC
TP12 TP11 +15 VDC
TP14 TP13 +15 VDC
TP16 TP15 +15 VDC

7-14 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

TP15, TP14, TP9, TP12,


TP16 TP13 TP10 TP11

TP6 (+12 VDC) TP2 (Reference)

Figure 7-7. Test points on the IPM Driver board

2. If +12 VDC is present on TP6, but any of the +15 VDC readings are low or
missing, replace the IPM Driver board.
3. On the Power Relay board, measure the voltage across TP1 (reference) and
TP5 (+12 VDC).
4. If the +12 VDC supply is low or missing, disconnect the cable between the
IPM Driver board and the Master Control board, and measure the voltage
again.
5. If the+12 VDC supply recovers, replace the IPM Driver board.

KV DAC Fault
Problem Description
Normally, the DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) receives a digital input
from the Main Control CPU, and outputs a corresponding analog voltage.
This DAC voltage is used to establish precision reference signals for kVp
regulation, mA output, filament levels, and AEC reference.

7 Troubleshooting 7-15
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

A DAC fault occurs when the CPU's the A-to-D converter finds the analog
signal produced by the DAC manager to be out of tolerance. This is an
internal failure within the Main Control board.
Corrective Action
Replace the Main Control board (see “Replacing the Main Control Board” on
page 8-15).

KV FB Fault
Problem Description
The kV feedback detected at microprocessor U30 on the Main Control board is
not within the acceptable range of the kV value displayed on the console.
When this fault occurs, observe the console display and note whether this is
the only fault or if the display alternates between this fault and Ma FB Fault
(on page 7-25).
Corrective Action
Select one of the following procedures:
• “If KV FB Fault is the only fault” on page 7-16
• “If You See Alternating KV FB Fault and Ma FB Fault” on page 7-17
If KV FB Fault is the only fault
Note: An oscilloscope is required to troubleshoot this fault.
1. Set the oscilloscope scale to 1V = 20kV, and connect the probe to Main
Control board TP6A, and the ground lead to TP22A.
2. Make an exposure and verify that the kV feedback signal is similar to that
in Figure 7-11. In particular, verify the correct amplitude of the signal.
(Waveforms may vary in time from what is shown in the figure. Because
an error is being produced and the exposure is being terminated, the total
time displayed for each waveform will probably be much shorter than the
example.)

Figure 7-8. Normal kV feedback waveform at TP6A, 60kV exposure

7-16 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. If the waveform is at the appropriate amplitude, but a the error message


persists, the Main Control board probably needs replacement. If the
waveform is not present, continue to the next step.
4. Verify that feedback cable 126-0177G2 is properly connected to J14 of the
Anthem power module and J1 of the Feedback board. Follow the labeling
on the cable to verify that the connections are correct on the HV tank.
5. Use an Ohmmeter to test the continuity of each cable conductor. If you
measure a high resistance on any of the conductors (or shorts between
them), replace the cable.
6. If the cable passes the connection and continuity tests, but the feedback
signal from the HT Tank is still not present, the HT Tank probably needs
replacement.
Note: The Feedback board, mounted on top of the HT Tank, is not individually
replaceable. If a component on the Feedback board has failed or is in question,
contact your technical support representative.
If You See Alternating KV FB Fault and Ma FB Fault
Note: A multimeter is required to troubleshoot this fault.

Warning
Use extreme caution when testing the DC rail. Harmful or lethal
voltages may be present.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2. Normally this reduces


the charge of the DC rail to nearly 0. If the DC rail does not discharge, the
IPMs may not be operating correctly.
2. Test the +/- 15VDC (PS1 – PS4) power supplies on the IPM Driver board.
These power supplies are isolated from a common ground and from each
other, so a single common reference cannot be used.
• PS1: TP9 / TP10 reference
• PS2: TP11 / TP12 reference
• PS3: TP13 / TP14 reference
• PS4: TP15 / TP16 reference
The acceptable range for these power supplies is 14.55 VDC – 15.45 VDC.
If a voltage is outside of this range, replace the IPM Driver board
(“Replacing the IPM Driver Board” on page 8-17).
If all of these voltages are within the acceptable range, continue to the next
step to measure the outputs of the IPM blocks.

7 Troubleshooting 7-17
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
Before proceeding, ensure that the main power is off and the DC rail
is FULLY discharged. If it will not discharge using the capacitor
discharge procedure, allow it to dissipate on its own.

3. Disconnect the cable from the bottom terminal (C2E1) for each IPM. See
Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9. IPM Block bottom C2E1 connections

4. On the left-side IPM, measure the resistance between upper terminal C1


and bottom output terminal C2E1 (seeFigure 7-10). Confirm that this
resistance is greater than 1 MΩ. If it is less, replace the IPM (“Replacing an
IPM Block” on page 8-19).
5. On the left-side IPM, measure the resistance between upper terminal C1
and middle output terminal E2. Confirm that this resistance is greater than
1 MΩ. If it is less, replace the IPM.

7-18 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

6. On the left-side IPM, measure the resistance between middle terminal E2


and bottom output terminal C2E1. Confirm that this resistance is greater
than 1 MΩ. If it is less, replace the IPM.

C1

E2

C2E1

Figure 7-10. IPM output terminals

7. Repeat Step 4 for the right-side IPM.


8. Repeat Step 5 for the right-side IPM.
9. Repeat Step 6 for the right-side IPM.
Note: Earlier Anthems use different IPM Blocks (654-5001P1, silver base) with
IPM Driver board 124-5130G1. Replacement requires an upgrade to the current IPM
Driver board 124-5144G1 and two IPM Blocks (654-5001P2, copper base). For more
information, see “Replacing the IPM Driver Board” on page 8-17 and “Replacing an
IPM Block” on page 8-19.

KV Hi Fault
Problem Description
The kV feedback signal detected by the Main Control board differs by ±10% or
more from the kV Ref signal produced by the Main Control board. A leading
cause of this fault is when the generator is out of calibration.
Other possible causes are a failed Main Control board or a failed HT Tank.
Corrective Action
Note: An oscilloscope is required to troubleshoot this fault.
1. Perform the entire kV, mA, and preheat procedures in “Calibration
Procedure” on page 3-1 3. Do not skip this step.
2. Set the oscilloscope scale to 1V = 20kV, and connect the probe to Main
Control board TP6A, and the ground lead to TP22A.

7 Troubleshooting 7-19
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. Make an exposure and verify that the kV feedback signal is similar to that
in Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11. Normal kV feedback waveform at TP6A, 60kV exposure

4. If the waveform measured on the oscilloscope is the correct voltage but


this error message persists, replace the Main Control board.
If the kV feedback is not at the correct level or the waveform is abnormal
at TP6A, continue to the next step to check the raw kV feedback coming
from the HT Tank.
5. Connect the oscilloscope probes to Main Control board TP2 (kV+) and TP3
(kV-), with ground leads connected to TP1. The scale of TP2 and TP3 are
1V=10kV when measuring between the positive and negative waveforms.
6. Make an exposure and verify that the kV feedback signal is similar to that
in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12. Normal kV feedback waveforms at TP2 / TP3, 60kV exposure

7. If the waveforms measured on the oscilloscope are the correct voltage but
the waveform in Step 3 is not, replace the Main Control board.
If the KV feedback is not at the correct level or the waveform is abnormal
at TP2 / TP3, continue to the next step to check the KV drive pulses being
output from the Main Control board to the IPM Driver board.

7-20 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
Before connecting oscilloscope test probes to any test points on the
IPM Driver board, the oscilloscope MUST be isolated from Earth
ground. Failure to isolate the scope will result in damage to the
generator and / or the oscilloscope.

8. Connect the oscilloscope probes to the IPM Driver board, TP6A and TP6B,
and connect the ground leads to TP5.
9. Make an exposure and verify that the kV drive pulses are similar to those
in Figure 7-13.

Figure 7-13. Normal kV drive waveform at TP6A / TP6B of the IPM Driver,
60kV exposure

Note: A change in selected kV on the console will result in a change in frequency


of this waveform, not amplitude.
10. If the kV drive signal is abnormal at TP6A and TP6B on the IPM Driver
board, replace the Main Control board.
If the KV drive signal is normal, replace the HT Tank.

KV Imbalance Fault
Problem Description
The difference in amplitude between the POSITIVE and NEGATIVE kV
feedback signals is greater than 8kV. It is a function of the HT Tank to
distribute the primary input evenly between the (+) anode and (-) cathode
sides of the transformer.
However, impedance differences in the HT cables can also influence the
individual kV feedback signals. When this occurs, the feedback turn-off time
can be longer on one side or the other, thus causing this error message.

7 Troubleshooting 7-21
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Corrective Action
1. Verify the error by observing the positive and negative kV feedback
signals directly from the HT Tank.
Note: An oscilloscope is required to troubleshoot this fault.
Connect the oscilloscope probes to Main Control board TP2 (kV+) and TP3
(kV-), with ground leads connected to TP1. Set the oscilloscope scale for
both channels to 1V = 10kV
2. Enter the calibration utility and make an exposure.
Verify that the anode and cathode waveforms are equal in amplitude, and
have the same turn-off times, as shown in Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14. Normal kV feedback waveforms at TP2 / TP3, 60kV exposure

3. If the kV waveforms are not equal or if an entire side is missing, check the
resistance of the feedback circuit on the HV transformer.
a. Turn the generator off and turn off the breaker.
b. Important: Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Warning
The DC bus capacitors hold a charge long after the generator and
breaker are turned off. Never perform any work inside the generator
without first performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

c. Disconnect the kV mA Feedback cable (126-0177G2) from the front of


the generator cabinet, connector J14.
d. Remove the lower cabinet front cover and remove the feedback board
cover.

7-22 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

e. Place an ohmmeter across J1-1 (+kV A) and J1-2 (kV GND). See
Figure 7-15. Confirm the measured resistance is about 35.5kΩ.

J1-3
J1-2
J1-1

Figure 7-15. Feedback terminal strip J1

f. Place an ohmmeter across J1-3 (- kV C) and J1-2 (kV GND). See


Figure 7-15. Confirm the measured resistance is about 35.5kΩ.
g. If the ohmic values measured at J1 are significantly different than
35.5kΩ or are not equal to each other, replace the HT Tank.
4. A slightly higher impedance on one of the HT cables would affect the
cable discharge time; thus causing a slightly longer kV trailing edge on the
affected side. This condition also causes this error message.
Repeat or review the oscilloscope test in Step 1 and Step 2, but this time
observing the trailing edge of both waveforms. Verify that the anode and
cathode waveforms have the same discharge rate curve, not like the
waveforms shown in Figure 7-16 on page 7-24.

7 Troubleshooting 7-23
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Figure 7-16. Unequal kV discharge curves

a. In Figure 7-13 notice the longer discharge time on the positive or anode
side of this waveform. To isolate a possible problem with one of the HT
cables, turn off the generator, and swap the anode and cathode cables.
Ensure all 4 HT cable connections are tight and secure.
b. Turn the generator on. Make another exposure with the same
oscilloscope and exposure settings and observe the waveform. If the
long trailing edge is on the opposite side, replace the HT cable set.

If the slow discharge remains on the same side, try another known
good X-ray tube, if possible (though it is uncommon for a tube to cause
this condition).
c. If the error message persists, replace the HT Tank.

KV LO Fault
Problem Description
The kV feedback signal detected by the Main Control board differs by ±10% or
more from the kV Ref signal produced by the Main Control board. A leading
cause of this fault is when the generator is out of calibration.
Corrective Action
For troubleshooting, see the corrective action for “KV Hi Fault” on page 7-19.

MA DAC Fault
Problem Description
Normally, the DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) receives a digital input
from the Main Control CPU, and outputs a corresponding analog voltage.
This DAC voltage is used to establish precision reference signals for kVp
regulation, mA output, filament levels, and AEC reference.

7-24 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

A DAC fault occurs when the CPU's the A-to-D converter finds the analog
signal produced by the DAC manager to be out of tolerance. This is an
internal failure within the Main Control board.
Corrective Action
Replace the Main Control board (see “Replacing the Main Control Board” on
page 8-15).

Ma FB Fault
Problem Description
The mA feedback detected at microprocessor U30 on the Main Control board
is not within the acceptable range of the mA value displayed on the console.
When this fault occurs, observe the console display and note whether this is
the only fault or if the display alternates between this fault and KV FB Fault
(on page 7-16).
Corrective Action
Select one of the following procedures:
• “If Ma FB Fault is the only fault” on page 7-25
• “If You See Alternating KV FB Fault and Ma FB Fault” on page 7-26
If Ma FB Fault is the only fault
Note: An oscilloscope is required to troubleshoot this fault.
1. Set the oscilloscope scale to 1V = 20mA (small focus) or 1V = 100mA (large
focus), and connect the probe to Main Control board TP47A, and the
ground lead to TP22A.
2. Make an exposure and verify that the mA feedback signal is similar to that
in Figure 7-17. In particular, verify the correct amplitude of the signal.
(Waveforms may vary in time from what is shown in the figure. Because
an error is being produced and the exposure is being terminated, the total
time displayed for each waveform will probably be much shorter than the
example.)

Figure 7-17. Normal mA feedback waveform at TP47A, 60kV exposure

7 Troubleshooting 7-25
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. If the waveform is at the appropriate amplitude, but a the error message


persists, the Main Control board probably needs replacement.
If the waveform is not present, continue to the next step.
4. To test capacitor C1, measure the resistance across resistor R1. R1 is a 100Ω
resistor with a tolerance of 1%. If the resistance is out of this spec
(typically, a failed C1 will cause a reading of around 70Ω), then replace C1
(part number 611-5027P1). See Figure 7-20.

R1 C1
Figure 7-18. Feedback circuit resistor R1 and capacitor C1 locations

5. To replace C1:
d. Cut the leads of the old capacitor as close to the body as possible,
leaving the leads attached to the board.
e. Tac solder the new capacitor onto the existing leads.
Note: You cannot remove the Feedback board from the HT Tank.
6. Verify that feedback cable 126-0177G2 is properly connected to J14 of the
Anthem power module and J1 of the Feedback board. Follow the labeling
on the cable to verify that the connections are correct on the HV tank.
7. Use an Ohmmeter to test the continuity of each cable conductor. If you
measure a high resistance on any of the conductors (or shorts between
them), replace the cable.
8. If the cable passes the connection and continuity tests, but the feedback
signal from the HT Tank is still not present, the HT Tank probably needs
replacement.
Note: The Feedback board, mounted on top of the HT Tank, is not individually
replaceable. If a component on the Feedback board has failed or is in question,
contact your technical support representative.
If You See Alternating KV FB Fault and Ma FB Fault
Go to “If You See Alternating KV FB Fault and Ma FB Fault” on page 7-17 and
perform the steps in that procedure.

7-26 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

mA Hi Fault
Problem Description
The mA feedback signal detected by the Main Control board differs by ±10%
or more from the mA Ref signal produced by the Main Control board. A
leading cause of this fault is when the generator is out of calibration.
Another possible cause is a failed capacitor on the kVmA Feedback board.
On the HT Tank Feedback board, capacitor C1 (Figure 7-19) might begin to
fail and leak DC current to ground, causing the mA feedback signal to
deteriorate.

Figure 7-19. Feedback circuit capacitor C1

Corrective Action
1. Perform the entire kV, mA, and preheat procedures in “Calibration
Procedure” on page 3-1 3. Do not skip this step.
2. If the error message persists, remove the lower cabinet front cover and
remove the feedback board cover.
3. To test capacitor C1, measure the resistance across resistor R1. R1 is a 100Ω
resistor with a tolerance of 1%. If the resistance is out of this spec
(typically, a failed C1 will cause a reading of around 70Ω), then replace C1
(part number 611-5027P1). See Figure 7-20.

R1 C1
Figure 7-20. Feedback circuit resistor R1 and capacitor C1 locations

7 Troubleshooting 7-27
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. To replace C1:
f. Cut the leads of the old capacitor as close to the body as possible,
leaving the leads attached to the board.
g. Tac solder the new capacitor onto the existing leads.
Note: You cannot remove the Feedback board from the HT Tank.
5. If the error message persists, replace the Main Control board.

mA LO Fault
Problem Description
The mA feedback signal detected by the Main Control board differs by ±10%
or more from the mA Ref signal produced by the Main Control board. A
leading cause of this fault is when the generator is out of calibration.
Corrective Action
For troubleshooting, see the corrective action for “mA Hi Fault” on page 7-27.

No AEC on Bucky
Problem Description
AEC is not active on the selected receptor.
Corrective Action
See “AEC Calibration Procedure” on page 3-18, which includes steps for
activating AEC.

No Feedback Cable
Problem Description
The feedback cable between the HT Tank and the Power Module has been
disconnected.
Corrective Action
Inspect the connection between the HT Tank and J14 on the Power Module.

No Fil Fault
Problem Description
Primary filament current feedback is not being detected by the CPU on the
Main Control board. Possible causes include:
• an open connection in the primary filament circuit
• low or no filament power supply

7-28 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

• no filament drive from the Main Control board


• a failure in the feedback circuit
Also, this error commonly occurs if an active Prep signal is detected during
the boot-up/turn-on sequence.
Note: The CPU continuously monitors current on the primary side of the filament
transformer, but not on the secondary side.
Corrective Action
Perform the following steps to check the primary filament cable, filament
supply voltage, filament reference signal, and filament drive signal. An
oscilloscope is required.
1. On the Filament board, TB1, inspect 126-5294G1 cable connections XC, XS,
and XL. See Figure 7-21.

TB1 on
Filament Board

Figure 7-21. Filament board TB1 location

2. The other end of cable 126-5294G1 connects to the top of the HT Tank, J2.
Ensure this connection is secure. If the cable itself is suspect, disconnect it
at J2 and test it with an ohmmeter for continuity and shorts.

7 Troubleshooting 7-29
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. At the Filament board, ensure the cable length jumper (which may be on
J4, J5, or J6) is secure. See Figure 7-22.

Long

Short

Medium

Figure 7-22. Filament board cable length jumper

4. Test for an open circuit on the primary side of the filament transformer:
a. At the top of the HT Tank, disconnect the cable from J2 connector from
the top of the high voltage transformer.
b. Measure and confirm no or very low (and the same) resistance between
these pins (see Figure 7-23 on page 7-30):
• XC to XS
• XC to XL

J2-3 XC
J2-1 XL

J2-2 XS

Secondary Primary
HV -

Figure 7-23. HT Tank J2 pinout

5. Confirm that there is filament supply voltage. The filament supply


originates as an AC input into the Power Relay board, rectified to a +/-50
VDC and sent to Filament board connector J8.
a. Verify a 36 VAC input to the Power Relay board at TB6-3 and TB6-5,
referenced to TB6-4 common. The voltage is rectified via BR4 and
protected by circuit breakers CB2 and CB3. Ensure these breakers are
not in a tripped condition.

7-30 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

b. Verify 50 VDC on the Power Relay board at TP7 (+50 VDC) TP9 (-50
VDC) referenced to TP8 filament common.
c. Verify 50 VDC on the Filament board at TP3 (+50 VDC) TP2 (-50 VDC)
referenced to TP1 filament common.
d. Verify that Filament board LED 2 and LED 3 are lit, indicating that
voltage is present at TP3 and TP2.
e. If 50 VDC is not present at TP3 and TP2 or is not the same as measured
in Step b, inspect the board-to-board connection between Power Relay
board TB8 and Filament board J8.
6. Verify the filament reference and filament drive signals. Based on the
selected mA station, the Main Control board generates a filament
reference signal to the PWM IC (U13), which determines the pulse width
of the filament drive signal. During exposure, the reference signal changes
up or down slightly, as it's compared to the actual mA feedback to
maintain a stable mA output.
a. Verify the FIL/mA Reference signal at TP54 on the Main Control
board. You should read approximately 2.1 -2.5 VDC in standby, and
depending on the mA station selected, read between 3.8 -4.5 VDC
during Prep. If these voltages are not present, replace the Main Control
board
b. Connect 2 channels of an oscilloscope to the Filament board TP4 (FIL
DR1) and TP5 (FIL DR2). connect the ground lead(s) to TP9.
c. Make an exposure and verify that the traces look like those in
Figure 7-24.

Idle stby Normal Condition Prep Normal Condition Filament Drive during the No Fil Fault

Figure 7-24. Filament Drive pulse signals

d. If these signals are not present, or if one signal is missing, ensure the
board-to-board ribbon cables are making good connections.
e. Verify if the FIL DR1 and FIL DR2 signals are present on the Main
Control board at U13 pin 8 or U13 pin 11. If these signals are not
present, or if one signal is missing on the Main Control board, replace
the Main Control board.
7. If the above measurements have been verified and the observed
waveforms are correct, replace the Filament board.

7 Troubleshooting 7-31
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Rotor Not Rdy Error


The correct Rotor Ready signal is not reaching the Main Control board when
in Prep. This can indicate the rotor is not spinning correctly or there is a
problem in the current sense circuitry.
Corrective Action
To determine if a failed board is causing this error, perform the tests below.
Refer to wiring diagrams in Chapter 9, “Electrical Schematics” and “Test
Points” on page 7-41 for test points, waveforms, and voltages.
Initial Steps
Before proceeding, confirm the following:
• All cables and connections are undamaged and secure.
• The X-ray tube is functioning correctly.
• The X-ray tube stator leads measure the following resistances:
• Common-to-Main: 20-30 Ω
• Common-to-Phase: 50-60 Ω
• Main-to-Phase; 70-90 Ω
Power Relay Board Test
If the Power Relay board displays any of the following symptoms, replace the
board. All DC test points use TP1 as a [-] reference unless otherwise noted.
• +12V1 is not present at TP6 (LED3 is not illuminated).
• Fuse F4 is open. If it is blown, replace it with a same-value fuse. If the fuse
continues to blow, check for wiring problems and/or issues with the tube
outside of the generator. If the wiring and tube exhibit no problems, the
Power Relay board may have failed.
• R7 is open.
• The DC voltage at test point U1 pin 9 goes low during PREP, but the DC
voltage at test point U2 pin 11 does not go low during PREP.
• The DC voltage at test point U2 pin 11 goes low during PREP, but the
proper AC voltage is not present at the SSR (Solid State Relay), across
TB1-12 and connector QC8.
• During PREP, the rotor start signal is present and correct at test point U1
pin 13 but not at U4 pin 16.
• The boost signal is present and correct at test point U3-3 but not at U4 pin
14.
• The Rotor Ready signal is present and correct at test point RN2 pin 10 but
not at U7 pin 8.
• The Rotor Feedback signal is not present or correct at test point OC3 pin 3.
• The SSR signal is present and correct at connector QC6 but the proper AC
voltage is still not passing through the SSR.

7-32 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Main Control Board Test


If the Main Control board displays any of the following symptoms, replace
the board. All DC test points use TP22 as a [-] reference unless otherwise
noted.
• During PREP, the rotor start signal is not present or correct at TP41.
• During PREP, the boost signal is not present or correct at test point U34
pin 4.
• The Rotor Ready signal is present and correct at test point U27 pin 6 but
the generator still does not enter a Ready state.

Filament Board Test


If the Filament board displays any of the following symptoms, replace the
board. All DC test points use TP9 as a [-] reference unless otherwise noted.
• During PREP, both the Rotor Start and Boost signals are present and
correct at test points U4 pin 6 and U4 pin 7, but the SSR signal is absent or
incorrect at test point U100 pin 1.
• During PREP, the Rotor Start, Boost, and SSR signals are present and
correct (see previous point) but the Rotor Ready signal is absent or
incorrect at test point U100 pin 13.
• The Rotor Feedback signal is present and correct on the cathode side of
D101, but the generator still does not enter a Ready state.

SD Card Error
Problem Description
An error has occurred while reading or attempting to read the inserted SD
card.
Note: Earlier Anthem generators manufactured between 2009 and 2013 had a 2GB
limit on the SD card capacity. Anthems manufactured after 2013 can read SD cards
with a capacity of up to 32GB.
Corrective Action
• Use only SD form-fit cards. Do not use micro SD cards with an adapter.
• Do not insert an SD card into the console while the console is turned on.
Insert and eject the SD card only when the console is off.

SD Card WP
Problem Description
The write protection switch, located on the left side of the SD card is in the
locked position. In this condition, the SD card does not allow data saving.

7 Troubleshooting 7-33
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Corrective Action
1. Power off the Anthem.
2. Remove the SD card from the back on the Anthem console. Locate the WP
switch on the left side of the SD card. Push the switch upward towards the
top of the SD card. This position unlocks the SD card.

Figure 7-25. SD card write-protect switch

3. Re-insert the SD card into the Anthem.

Soft Charge Fault


Problem Description
Exposure is inhibited and the Anthem cannot enter the Ready state because
during Prep, the capacitor bank is not reporting a full charge.
Normally, during Prep, the soft charge circuit energizes relay K12 to close its
contacts, which trickle charges the DC-rail capacitors through a limiting
resistor. When the capacitors reach full charge, the IPM Driver board sends an
SC (Soft Charge) Complete signal to the Main Control board.
If the Main Control board does not receive an SC Complete signal soon
enough, it inhibits advancement to the Ready state, and issues this message.
Corrective Action
To help identify the cause or faulty component, perform the following
procedure to test the relay, diode packs, and related circuitry. Refer to the
schematic diagram on page 9-11.

Warning
The following procedure exposes you to high voltage connections.
Take all necessary precautions and always assume the DC rail
capacitors are holding charge (until discharge is confirmed with a
meter), even if the power is turned off.

1. Remove the Power Module front cover and open the door.

7-34 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2. Verify that relay K12 is closing during the Prep state:


a. Connect an AC voltmeter to connectors Power Relay board connectors
QC9 and QC11. See Figure 7-26.
K12 and Connectors
QC9 - QC12

Power Relay Board

K12 QC10

QC11 QC12
QC9

Figure 7-26. Soft charge relay test point (QC) locations

b. Initiate the Prep state and verify that the voltage goes from 0 VAC to
about 280 VAC.
c. Connect the AC voltmeter to connectors QC10 and QC12.
d. Again, initiate the Prep state and verify that the voltage goes from 0
VAC to about 280 VAC.
e. If the previous steps pass, go to “If K12 is Properly Closing” on
page 7-35.

If the previous steps fail, go to “If K12 is Not Properly Closing” on


page 7-37.
If K12 is Properly Closing
1. Power off the Anthem and perform the “Discharge Procedure” on
page 6-2.

7 Troubleshooting 7-35
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2. Locate the soft-charge resistor (inside the power module, to the right; see
Figure 7-27 on page 7-36), and measure its resistance. Verify the resistance
is between 47.5Ω and 52.5Ω. If it is not, replace the resistor.

IPM Driver
Board

Soft-Charge
Resistor
Diode
Packs (3)

Front DC
Storage
Capacitor

Figure 7-27. Soft-charge resistor and diode pack locations

If the resistor measures within tolerance, continue to the next step.


3. Verify that, during Prep, the DC rail is properly charging.
a. Power up the Anthem.
b. Connect a DC voltmeter to the front DC storage capacitor (Figure 7-27).
c. Initiate the Prep state and verify that the voltage gradually rises to
about 250 VDC. Also confirm that, on the IPM Driver board, LED1A
(red, located toward the top left) illuminates.
4. If there is not 250 VDC on the DC rail, test the 3 diode packs located below
the IPM assembly and behind the front DC storage capacitor. See
Figure 7-27.
a. Power off the Anthem and perform the “Discharge Procedure” on
page 7-1.
b. Remove all connections from the diode packs and remove the 3 diode
packs for bench testing.
c. Using the diode test feature on a multimeter and the following
measurements and Figure 7-28, test the diode packs.
•Red probe on T1, black probe on T2 = 0.4V
•Black probe on T1, red probe on T2 = ∞ or open
•Red probe on T3, black probe on T1 = 0.4V
•Black probe on T3, red probe on T1 = ∞ or open
•Red probe on T3, black probe on T2 = 0.8V
•Black probe on T3, red probe on T2 = ∞ or open
Note: These values are approximate and minor deviations are acceptable

7-36 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

T1 T2 T3
Figure 7-28. Diode pack test points

d. Replace any diode packs that fail.


If K12 is Not Properly Closing
1. Using a multimeter, verify the following DC voltage readings:
• Power Relay board, TP6 (+12V1) (reference TP1): +12 VDC
• Main Control board, TP25 (reference TP22): +5 VDC
Refer to Figure 2-38 on page 2-37, Figure 2-39 on page 2-38, and the Power
Supply Distribution schematic on page 9-6.
1. Connect a multimeter to the Power Relay board, U4-13 (Figure 7-29) with
ground lead to TP1, and verify the DC voltage is +12 VDC.

U3

U4

Figure 7-29. Power Relay board U3 and U4 locations

2. Put the Anthem into the Prep state and verify that the voltage on U4-13
goes low.
1. If, during Prep, this voltage goes low and the 280 VAC is present at QC9
and QC11 but not at QC10 and QC12, replace the Power Relay board.
2. If the voltage on U4-13 remains high (+12 VDC) during the Prep state,
verify the voltage at U3-5 on the Power Relay board:
• during Prep: low
• during standby: The voltage here should be +5VDC in standby and go
low during Prep.

7 Troubleshooting 7-37
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

3. If U3-5 goes low during Prep but U4-13 remains at +12 VDC, replace the
Power Relay board.
If U3-5 remains high during Prep, swap the ribbon cable between Power
Relay board TB4 and Main Control board J4 with another cable to see if
the condition changes. If this is still true after the cable swap, replace the
Main Control board.

Table Bucky Not Rdy


Problem Description
The table Bucky or grid-cabinet interlock is not satisfied.
Corrective Action
Inspect the table Bucky/grid-cabinet connections. See “Table Bucky
Connections” on page 2-21 or “Table Grid Cabinet Connections” on page 2-22.

Wall Bucky Not Rdy


Problem Description
The wallstand Bucky or grid-cabinet interlock is not satisfied.
Corrective Action
Inspect the wallstand Bucky/grid-cabinet connections. See “Wallstand Bucky
Connections” on page 2-19 or “Wallstand Grid Cabinet Connections” on
page 2-20.

XRay Tube Overheat


Problem Description
Excessive X-ray tube housing heat has resulted in the opening of the
embedded tube thermal switch. This is not to be confused with anode heat.

Warning
This condition is potentially dangerous. Due to the excessive heat
built up in the X-ray tube, higher than normal pressures are also
present. If the thermal switch fails, is tampered with, or is electrically
bypassed, this condition can be an explosion hazard.

7-38 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Corrective Action

Warning
Do not attempt any prep or exposure commands while this error is
present.

1. Allow the X-ray tube to cool completely. Refer to the tube manual for
thermal characteristics and cooling data.
2. Monitor the thermal switch in the tube.
a. Inspect the condition of the thermal switch wires, and inspect the
connections at the Room Interface board TB3-4 and TB3-5.
b. Disconnect the two thermal switch wires from the Room Interface
board TB3-4 and TB3-5.
c. Measure the resistance of the thermal switch and wires.
If the switch is open, this indicates an overheat condition.
If the switch is closed, this indicates a normal condition.
The thermal switch automatically closes when the tube is cool enough
for safe use.
d. If this error message reoccurs or persists, contact your service
representative

7.5 Frequently Asked Questions


Q. I have black horizontal lines going across the screen. How can I fix this?
A. Thin or even heavy black horizontal lines are usually signs the LCD
module is starting to fail. Poor connections between the LCD module and the
console CPU board can also produce lines across the display. Ensure that
connections are secure and if so, replace the LCD module, which includes the
backlight.

Q. Can I change the default APR program from Medical to Vet on my Anthem
Console?
A. Yes. Follow these steps:
1. Power off the console.
2. On the bottom row of buttons, below the display, press and hold the
second button from the left.
3. While holding this button, turn the console on, then release the buttons

7 Troubleshooting 7-39
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Enter the password (default 0000) and press OK. You enter Service Mode.
5. Select FLASH OPTIONS
6. Select DFLT APR DATA. You see “Are you sure” After a few seconds the
console beeps and you see OK
7. Press Exit, and then press Exit again. You see VET.
You can use the same procedure to go from Vet to Medical.

Q. How do I change the time or the date on the console?


A. To set the clock, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the console and wait 10 seconds.
2. On the bottom row of buttons, below the display, press and hold the first
button from the left.
3. While holding this button, turn the console on
4. When the screen comes on, release the button. You are now in
Administrative Mode.
5. On the right side of the display select SET CLOCK. You see the clock setting
screen, with buttons for MONTH, DAY, YEAR, HOUR, MIN, and SEC.
6. For each setting, press the associated button and rotate the knob to set the
desired value.
7. To exit Administrative Mode, press the EXIT button. This reboots the
console to User Mode.

Q. My Console is displaying a “Comm” error. Where should I start troubleshooting?


A. Go to “Comm. Error” on page 7-6.

Q. My room layout has changed and now the console is further than 45’ from the
Power Cabinet. Is a longer console cable available?
A. There are longer console cables available: 65’ Part# 126-5174G65 and 75’
Part# 126-5174G75

Q. If I have 3-phase generator, can it be converted to be used on a single phase line?


A. This is not possible. Anthem generators are built for specific line power.

7-40 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

7.6 Test Points


For test point locations, see “Board and Test Point Locations” on page 2-35.
For test point schematic references, see Chapter 9, “Electrical Schematics”.

7.6.1 Filament Board Test Points


Test Point Reference Signal Value
TP2 TP1 +50V-FIL +50VDC
TP3 TP1 -50V-FIL -50VDC
TP4 / 5 TP9 FIL DR1 / FIL DR2 Standby:

Prep:

TP6 TP9 FIL Fault Normal Operation: +12VDC


Fault Condition: 0V
TP7 TP9 FIL FB Standby:

Prep:

7 Troubleshooting 7-41
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


TB1-1 TB1-3 X-LG Standby: 16VAC*
Prep: 30VAC*
TB1-2 TB1-3 X-SM Standby: 16VAC*
Prep: 30VAC*
U4-2 TP9 XS Small Focus: +7VDC
Large Focus: +0.5VDC
U4-6 TP9 Rotor Start Standby: +7VDC
Prep: 0V
U4-7 TP9 Boost Standby: +7VDC
Prep: 0V
Ready: +7VDC
U100-1 TP9 SSR Standby: +12VDC
Prep: 0V
Ready:

U100-13 TP9 Rotor Ready Standby: +12VDC


Prep: 0V
R115 / D101 TP9 Rotor Feedback Prep:

Ready:

* Values can vary depending on multimeter used.

7-42 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

7.6.2 Power Relay Board Test Points


Test Point Reference Signal Value
TP3 TP2 9V Standby +9VDC
TP4 TP1 -15V -15VDC
TP5 TP1 +12V +12VDC
TP6 TP1 +12V1 +12VDC
TP7 TP8 +50V-FIL +50VDC
TP9 TP8 -50V-FIL -50VDC
TP10 TP11 +12VS +12VDC
TP10B TP11 +12VSB +12VDC
TP12 TP1 -12VAEC -12VDC
TP13 TP1 +12VAEC +12VDC
TB1-2 TB1-1 24VAC 24VAC
TB1-4 TB1-5 +24VDC +24VDC
TB1-10 TB1-8 Rotor Phase Prep Boost: 330VAC
TB1-12 TB1-8 Rotor Main Prep Boost: 240VAC
TB6-3 TB6-4 36VAC 36VAC
TB6-5 TB6-4 36VAC 36VAC
TB6-7 TB6-6 120VAC 120VAC
TB6-9 TB6-8 24VAC 24VAC
TB6-11 TB6-10 20VAC 20VAC
TB7-2 TB7-6 240V 240VAC
TB8-10 TB8-9 120VAC 120VAC
U1-1 TP1 MC EN Standby: +5VDC
Expose: 0V
U1-3 TP1 W Strt Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
(only when wall Bucky is selected)
U1-5 TP1 T Strt Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
(only when wall Bucky is selected)
U6-3 TP1 Door Intl Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
U6-6 TP1 Collimator Intl Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
U6-8 TP1 Wall Rdy Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
U6-11 TP1 Table Rdy Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
U1-9 TP1 Prep Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V

7 Troubleshooting 7-43
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


U1-13 TP1 Rotor Start Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
U2-11 TP1 Prep Standby: +12VDC
Prep: 0V
U2-12 TP1 Prep Standby: +12VDC
Prep: 0V
U2-13 TP1 T Strt Standby: +12VDC
Prep: 0V
(only when table Bucky is selected)
U2-14 TP1 W Strt Standby: +12VDC
Prep: 0V
(only when table Bucky is selected)
U2-16 TP1 MC EN Standby / Prep: +12VDC
Expose: 0V
U3-1 TP1 X-Select Small Focus: +5VDC
Large Focus: +0.5VDC
U3-3 TP1 Boost Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
Ready: +5VDC
U3-5 TP1 SC EN Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
Expose: +5VDC
U4-13 TP1 SC EN Standby: +7VDC
Prep: 0V
Expose: +7VDC
U4-14 TP1 Boost Standby: +7VDC
Prep: 0V
Ready: +7VDC
U4-15 TP1 X-Select Small Focus: +5VDC
Large Focus: +0.5VDC
U4-16 TP1 Rotor Start Standby: +7VDC
Prep: 0V
U7-6 TP1 FIL Fault Normal Operation: +5VDC
Fault Condition: 0V
U7-8 TP1 Rotor Ready Standby: +3.3VDC
Prep: 0V

7-44 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


OC3-3 TP1 Rotor FB Prep:

Ready:

OC5-4 TP1 FIL Fault Normal Operation: +7VDC


Fault Condition: 0V
RN2-10 TP1 Rotor Ready Standby: +12VDC
Prep: 0V
RN2-13 TP1 Table Rdy Not Ready: +12VDC
Ready: 0V
RN2-14 TP1 Wall Rdy Not Ready: +12VDC
Ready: 0V
RN2-15 TP1 Collimator Intl Interlock Open: +12VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
RN2-16 TP1 Door Intl Interlock Open: +12VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
SSR+ TP1 +12V1 +12VDC
SSR- TP1 SSR Standby: +12VDC
Prep: 0V
Ready:

7 Troubleshooting 7-45
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

7.6.3 Main Control Board Test Points


Test Point Reference Signal Value
TP2 TP1 kV+ Expose:

TP3 TP1 kV- Expose:

TP6A TP22A kV FB 1V=20kV


TP7 TP22 kV REF DC voltage dependent on selected kV; will be
between +0.7VDC and 2.7VDC
TP8 TP22 kV EN Standby / Prep: +3.3VDC
Expose:

TP9 TP22 Expose Standby: +5VDC


Prep: 0V
TP10 TP22 kV IMB FLT Normal Operation: +3.3VDC
Fault Condition: 0V
TP11 TP22 kV HT FLT Normal Operation: +3.3VDC
Fault Condition: 0V
TP12 TP22 IPM FLT Normal Operation: 0V
Fault Condition: +5VDC
TP13 TP22 SC Complete Soft Charge Complete: 0V
Soft Charge Incomplete: +3.3VDC

7-46 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


TP16 TP15 CAN HI

Note: Waveform can change depending on


conditions.
TP17 TP15 CAN LO

Note: Waveform can change depending on


conditions.
TP20 TP22 -12V -12VDC
TP21 TP22 +12V +12VDC
TP23 TP15 +5VC +5VDC
TP24 TP22 VREF +3.1VDC
TP25 TP22 +5V +5VDC
TP26 TP22 +3.3V +3.3VDC
TP26A TB13A-8 +3.3VA +3.3VDC
(Power Relay
board)
TP40 TP22 X-Select Small Focus: +5VDC
Large Focus: +0.5VDC
TP41 TP22 Rotor Start Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
TP42 TP22 SC EN Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
Expose: +5VDC
TP44 TP22 FIL REF Standby: +1VDC
Prep: +2VDC

7 Troubleshooting 7-47
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


TP45 TP22 MA REF Dependent on Selected mA +0.3VDC ~ +2VDC
Expose:

TP47A TP22B MA FB Small Focus: 1VDC=20mA


Large Focus: 1VDC=100mA
Expose:

TP48 TP22 FIL FB 1VDC=2A FIL Current


Typical FIL FB:
Standby: +1.1VDC
Prep: +1.9VDC
TP50 TP22 FIL PCB FLT Normal Operation: 0V
Fault Condition: +3.3VDC

TP51 TP22 MA HI FLT Normal Operation: +3.3VDC


Fault Condition: 0V

TP52 TP22 FIL HI FLT Normal Operation: +3.3VDC


Fault Condition: 0V

TP53 TP22 MA Actual Small Focus: 1VDC=20mA


Large Focus: 1VDC=100mA
Expose:

TP300 TP22C W AEC Ramp


TP301 TP22C T AEC Ramp
TP302 TP22C W AEC REF

7-48 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


TP303 TP22C T AEC REF
U5-8 / U5-11 TP22 kV DR1 / kV DR2 Expose:

U13-8 / U13- TP22 FIL DR1 / FIL DR2 Standby:


11

Prep:

U15-1 TP22 FIL-FB

U18-12 TP22 FIL Fault Normal Operation: +3.3VDC


Fault Condition: 0V
U20-5 TP22 FIL EN Filament On: 0V
Filament Off: +5VDC
U27-4 TP22 Wall Rdy Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
U27-5 TP22 Table Rdy Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V

7 Troubleshooting 7-49
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


U27-6 TP22 Rotor Ready Standby: +3.3VDC
Prep: 0V
U27-8 TP22 Door Intl Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
U27-9 TP22 Collimator Intl Interlock Open: +3.3VDC
Interlock Closed: 0V
U31-8 TP22 T Strt Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
(only when table Bucky is selected)

U31-10 TP22 W Strt Standby: +5VDC


Prep: 0V
(only when wall Bucky is selected)
U32-10 TP22 MC EN Standby: +5VDC
Expose: 0V
U34-4 TP22 Boost Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
Ready: +5VDC
U42-2 TB13A-8 Prep SW Standby: +3.3VDC
(Power Relay Prep: 0V
board)
U42-5 TP22C Prep Standby: +5VDC
Prep: 0V
U305-1 TP22C Center Sel Cell On: +3.3VDC
Cell Off: 0V
U305-3 TP22C Left Sel Cell On: +3.3VDC
Cell Off: 0V
U305-5 TP22C W Start
U305-11 TP22C W Start
U305-13 TP22C Left Cell On: +0.6VDC
Cell Off: 0V
U305-15 TP22C Center Cell On: +0.6VDC
Cell Off: 0V
U306-1 TP22C Right Sel Cell On: +3.3VDC
Cell Off: 0V

7-50 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


U306-3 TP22C T Start
U306-13 TP22C T Start
U306-15 TP22C Right Cell On: +0.6VDC
Cell Off: 0V
R22 TP22 Bus Monitor Rail Discharged:

Rail Charged:

7 Troubleshooting 7-51
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

7.6.4 Console Board Test Points


Test Point Reference Signal Value
TP2 TP1 +3.3V +3.3VDC
TP3 TP5 CAN LO

Note: This waveform can change depending


on conditions.
TP4 TP5 CAN HI

Note: This waveform can change depending


on conditions.
TP6 TP1 ENA In While Encoder is Rotating:

TP7 TP1 ENB In While Encoder is Rotating:

7-52 7 Troubleshooting
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Test Point Reference Signal Value


C2+ TP5 +5VC +5VDC
C3+ TP1 9V Console +9VDC
C4+ TP1 +5V +5VDC
C4B+ TP1 +5V1 +5VDC

7.6.5 IPM Driver Board Test Points


Test Point Reference Signal Value
TP3 TP5 BUS Monitor DC BUS Charged: +2VDC
DC BUS Discharged: +4VDC
TP4 TP5 SC Complete Soft Charge Complete: 0V
Soft Charge Incomplete: +3.3VDC
TP6 TP5 +12V +12VDC
TP9 TP10 PS1 Output +15VDC
TP11 TP12 PS2 Output +15VDC
TP13 TP14 PS3 Output +15VDC
TP15 TP16 PS4 Output +15VDC
U5-1 TP2 PS5 Output +15VDC

7.7 LED Functions


Filament Board LED Descriptions
LED1. Illuminates when the FIL FAULT line goes low. This signal can trigger
either a FIL PCB Fault or NO FIL Fault. The LED remains lit briefly until the
fault is recognized on the Main Control board.
LED2. Indicates the positive filament power supply (+50VDC) is present.
LED3. Indicates the negative filament power supply (-50VDC) is present.
LED4. Indicates when the SSR (solid state relay) is energized and power is
being applied to the rotor. Under normal conditions, the LED illuminates
solid during Prep until the rotor feedback circuit indicates the rotor is at full
speed. When at full speed, pulses are sent to the SSR and the LED also pulses.

Power Relay Board LED Descriptions


LED1. Indicates a continuous circuit through the line match and toroidal
transformers thermal switches. This is required to satisfy the line monitor and
comparator circuit that energizes K11 to supply incoming power to the
toroidal transformer.

7 Troubleshooting 7-53
Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

LED2. Indicates the console power supply (+9VDC) is present.


LED3. Indicates the +12V1 power supply is present.
LED4. Indicates the -15V power supply is present.

Console Board LED Descriptions


LED1. Displays the heartbeat for the console CPU. This LED illuminates for
the duration of 1 second every other second.

IPM Driver Board LED Descriptions


LED1A. Indicates high voltage on the DC BUS (up to about +400 VDC). The
intensity of the illumination varies depending the amount of charge in the
capacitor bank.
LED2. Illuminates while the soft charge circuit is trickle charging the
capacitor bank. This LED illuminates only when soft charge is active. Once the
capacitor bank is fully charged, the LED turns off.

Main Control Board LED Descriptions


LED1. Displays the heartbeat for the main CPU. This LED pulses once every 2
or 3 seconds.

7-54 7 Troubleshooting
8 Component Replacement

Component
Replacement 8
8.1 Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for replacing most of the major assemblies
on the generator.

Warning
All service and maintenance including the procedures described
within this chapter, are to be performed by qualified service
personnel only.

8.2 Repair Acceptance Testing


At the completion of repairs or maintenance, Del Medical advises that you
perform acceptance testing on the subsystem affected by this activity. Use the
workbook and check sheet provided in this manual, Chapter 4, “Acceptance
Testing”. Use the section(s) that pertains to the repair, then record and retain
the results.
You can also acquire a copy of the document and form from
support.delmedical.com, or by contacting Del Medical Technical Support. If
you want Del Medical to retain a copy of these acceptance test records, send a
copy to QARA@delmedical.com.

8.3 Discharge Procedure


When ever you are performing maintenance, repair, or service on the
generator that requires you to open the upper or lower cabinet you must
always make sure the unit is discharged. Discharge the generator according to
“Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2

8 Component Replacement 8-1


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8.4 Removing the Front Panel


This is a common procedure that is referenced in replacement procedures that
follow in this chapter.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
Turn off all electrical power to the generator. Also, make sure that
power source is locked out and tagged “Equipment Being Serviced”
before servicing the generator. Otherwise you can be seriously
injured.

Warning
Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
1. On the lower cabinet, unscrew the four front panel screws (Figure 8-1) and
remove the front panel.

Figure 8-1. Front panel screw locations

8-2 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8.5 Removing the Upper Cabinet Cover


This is a common procedure that is referenced in replacement procedures that
follow in this chapter.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
1. Unscrew eight upper cabinet cover screws (two in front and three on each
side) and lift off cover (Figure 8-2).
Lift Cover Up
and Off

Side Screws

Front Screws

Figure 8-2. Removal of upper cabinet cover

8 Component Replacement 8-3


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

2. Unscrew the two thumb screws (Figure 8-3) to swing open the power
module door.

Thumbscrews

Figure 8-3. Power module door thumbscrews.

8.6 Replacing Fuses on the Power Relay Board


The Power Relay board is located inside the upper cabinet cover.

Power Relay Board

Figure 8-4. Power Relay board location

Tools Required
• Standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

8-4 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to Section “Removing the Upper
Cabinet Cover” on page 8-3.

Caution
Replace fuses only with same type and rating of fuse or machine may
get damaged.

8 Component Replacement 8-5


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Gently pry each fuse out of its holder.


F1 F2 F3
1 A, 250 V 8 A, 250 V, T 2 A, 250 V

F4
10 A, 250 V

Figure 8-5. Fuse Location on Power Relay board

5. Reverse steps to reassemble.

Caution
Make sure there are no tools or loose hardware left inside the
generator before remounting the cover.

6. Remount the upper cabinet cover.

8.7 Replacing Transformers


Single-phase generators have two transformers, one isolation transformer and
one line match transformer. Both are located in the upper cabinet.
3-phase generators have one transformer in the upper cabinet (isolation
transformer) and three transformers in the lower cabinet (line match
transformers).

8-6 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8.7.1 Single-phase Generators


The line match transformer and the isolation transformer are located in the
power module inside the upper cabinet.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)
• needle-nose pliers

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to “Removing the Upper Cabinet
Cover” on page 8-3.

Replacing the Line Match Transformer (Single-phase Generator)


4. At the rear of the power module, disconnect the 4 line match transformer
wires. See Figure 8-6.

Line Match Transformer Wires


Figure 8-6. Line match transformer wire connections (single-phase)

8 Component Replacement 8-7


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5. At the open front of the power module, pull the disconnected transformer
wires through the rear panel opening.
6. Unscrew the mounting nut from the bolt that secures the line match
transformer to the mounting bracket (Figure 8-7). Remove the line match
transformer.

Line Match
Transformer

Mounting Nut

TB6 TB7 (Obscured by Components)


Figure 8-7. Location of line match transformer (single-phase).

7. Mount the replacement transformer to mounting bracket. You might need


to unmount the bracket from the frame.
8. Route and connect the line match transformer power wires to the TB1 on
the back of the power module. Each wire from the line match transformer
is labeled with the corresponding socket number on TB1.

Caution
Make sure there are no tools or loose hardware left inside the
generator before remounting the cover.

9. Remount the upper cabinet cover.

Replacing the Isolation Transformer (Single-phase Generator)


The isolation transformer is located underneath the line match transformer in
the upper cabinet.
1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.
2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove the line match transformer as described in “Replacing the Line
Match Transformer (Single-phase Generator)” on page 8-7 to page 6-10.

8-8 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

4. Disconnect all wires from the isolation transformer on TB6 and TB7 (see
Figure 8-7) on the Power Relay board.
5. Unscrew and retain the bolt holding the isolation transformer in place and
remove the isolation transformer.
6. Mount new isolation transformer to the bottom of the power module
using the bolt retained in step 4.
7. Connect all wires to the Power Relay board. Each wire from the isolation
transformer is labeled with the corresponding terminal number on the
Power Relay board TB6 and TB7 (see Figure 8-7).

Caution
Make sure there are no tools or loose hardware left inside the
generator before remounting the cover.

8. Remount the upper cabinet cover.

8.7.2 3-phase Generators


The three line match transformers are located on the bottom of the lower
cabinet and the isolation transformer is located on the bottom of the power
module inside the upper cabinet.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)
• needle-nose pliers

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.

Replacing the Line Match Transformer(s) (3-phase Generator)


3. Remove the front panel according to “Removing the Front Panel” on
page 8-2.

8 Component Replacement 8-9


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

The three line match transformers are located on the bottom of the lower
cabinet (Figure 8-8). Each line match transformer is connected to its
corresponding terminal block above the transformers.

Line Match Terminal Blocks


Transformers
Figure 8-8. Location of line match transformers (3-phase)

4. At the applicable terminal block, disconnect the wires from the line match
transformer(s) you are about to replace.
5. Unscrew and retain the bolt(s) holding the line match transformer(s) in
place and remove the line match transformer(s).
Note: When replacing the line match transformer in the rear, you must
remove the terminal block bracket.
6. Connect the line match transformer(s) power wires to its corresponding
terminal block on the terminal block bracket. Each wire from the line
match transformer is labeled with the corresponding socket number on
the terminal block.

Caution
Make sure there are no tools or loose hardware left inside the
generator before remounting the cover.

7. Remount the front panel.

Replace Isolation Transformer (3-phase Generator)


The isolation transformer is located on the bottom of the power module inside
the upper cabinet.

8-10 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to “Removing the Upper Cabinet
Cover” on page 8-3.
4. Disconnect all wires from the isolation transformer on TB6 and TB7 (see
Figure 8-9) on the Power Relay board.

Mounting Bolt

Isolation
Transformer

TB6 TB7
Figure 8-9. Location of isolation transformer and connections (3-phase)

5. Unscrew and retain the transformer mounting bolt, and remove the
isolation transformer.
6. Mount the replacement isolation transformer to the bottom of the power
module using the bolt retained in Step 5.
7. Connect all wires to the Power Relay board. Each wire from the isolation
transformer is labeled with the corresponding terminal number on the
Power Relay board TB6 and TB7 (see Figure 8-9).

Caution
Make sure there are no tools or loose hardware left inside the
generator before remounting the cover.

8. Remount the upper cabinet cover.

8 Component Replacement 8-11


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8.8 Replacing Boards


There are five boards on the Anthem generator. They are all located inside the
upper cabinet as shown in Figure 8-10.

Room Interface Board

IPM Driver Board

IPM Blocks (2)

Power Relay Board

Main Control Board

Filament Board
Figure 8-10. Board locations

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

8-12 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8.8.1 Replacing the Filament Board


When ordering the Filament board, consult Del Medical Technical Support to
confirm the correct version required. To replace the Filament board, perform
the following steps.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to Section “Removing the Upper
Cabinet Cover” on page 8-3.
4. Unplug all connectors to the Filament board (see Figure 8-10 on
page 8-12).
5. Unscrew and retain the six Phillips head screws and remove the board.
6. Reassemble by reversing steps. Each connector for the Filament board is
labeled with the corresponding socket number on the Filament board.
Also make sure to fit the terminal connections on the back of the Filament
board gently to the terminal on the back of the Room Interface board.

8.8.2 Replacing the Power Relay Board


To replace the 124-5136G2 Power Relay board, perform the following steps.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

8 Component Replacement 8-13


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to Section “Removing the Upper
Cabinet Cover” on page 8-3.
4. Locate the Power Relay board (Figure 8-10 on page 8-12), and disconnect
discrete wire connections OC1/2/9/10/11.
5. Disconnect the wires at TB6 and TB7. See Figure 8-11 on page 8-15.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable connectors at TB2, TB3, TB4, and TB5.
7. Remove and retain the 5 mounting screws.
8. Gently pry up the white inter-board connectors TB13A, TB1 and TB8 to
disconnect the board from Main Control board and Filament board
respectively.
9. Separate each of the board mounting clip pins from the board by pinching
the tab on each pin and lifting the board over the tab. Remove the board.
10. Snap the replacement board onto the 3 mounting clip pins.
11. Mate the board to the other 2 boards at white connectors TB13A, TB1 and
TB8. Ensure the connectors are fully mated.
12. Reinstall the 5 mounting screws

8-14 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

13. Reconnect the ribbon cable connectors at TB2, TB3, TB4, and TB5.

TB7 Mounting Clip Pins TB6

OC1/2

TB13A TB1

TB8

TB4 OC9-12

TB2

TB5

TB3

Figure 8-11. Power Relay board connections

14. Reconnect the wires at TB6 and TB7, carefully observing the labels on the
wires.
15. Reconnect the wires at OC1/2/9/10/11.
16. Reattach the upper cabinet cover and reconnect power.

8.8.3 Replacing the Main Control Board


To replace the 124-5132G2 Main Control board, perform the following steps.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

8 Component Replacement 8-15


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Optional or if possible: Use the console Service Mode to export calibration


data to an SD card. Or, if this has already been done, locate the calibration
backup SD card.
2. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.
3. Turn off all power to the generator.
4. Remove upper cabinet cover according to Section “Removing the Upper
Cabinet Cover” on page 8-3.
5. On the Power Relay board (to the right of the Main Control board),
remove and retain the 5 mounting screws.
6. Gently pry up the white inter-board connectors TB13A, TB1 and TB8 to
disconnect the Power Relay board from Main Control board and Filament
board respectively.
7. Separate each of the board mounting clip pins from the board by pinching
the tab on each pin and lifting the board over the tab. Set the to the side.
8. Unplug all connectors to the Main Control board (Figure 8-10, kV/mA
feedback cable, console cable and, if applicable, ion chamber cables).
9. Remove and retain the 9 mounting screws and remove the Main Control
board.
10. Mount the replacement Main Control board with the 9 mounting screws.
11. Reconnect the Main Control board cables.
12. Reinstall the Power Relay board.
13. If you have a backup of this calibration on an SD Card, import the
calibration data via the console. See “The Service Mode Menu” on
page 2-40. Otherwise, continue to the next step.
14. Perform the procedure “mA Calibration” on page 3-6.
15. If applicable, perform the “AEC Calibration Procedure” on page 3-18

8-16 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8.8.4 Replacing the IPM Driver Board


Earlier Anthems use different IPM blocks (654-5001P1, silver base) with IPM
Driver board 124-5130G1. Replacement requires an upgrade to the current
IPM Driver board 124-5144G1 and two IPM blocks (654-5001P2, copper base).
When ordering a replacement IPM Driver board, you must first know the
model number of IPM Driver board currently installed. This will determine if
a full IPM upgrade is required.
To confirm the correct replacement models required, see Table 8-1 or consult
Del Medical Technical Support.

installed IPM IPM Driver Board Snubber Replace-


Driver Board Replacement IPM Replacement ment (1 per IPM)
124-5130G1 124-5144G1 654-5001P2 122-5119G1
(2 required) (2 required)
124-5144G1 124-5144G1 use existing 122-5119G1
(2 required)
Table 8-1. IPM Driver board compatibility
To determine the part number for your IPM Driver Board, see the board
marking near the center, as shown in Figure 8-13.

Part Number
124-5130G1
or
124-5144G1

Figure 8-12. IPM Driver board part number identification

To replace the IPM Driver board, perform the following steps.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

8 Component Replacement 8-17


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to Section “Removing the Upper
Cabinet Cover” on page 8-3.
4. Unplug the 2 cable connectors to the IPM Driver board (Figure 8-13).
Mounting Screws (4) IPM Driver Board

IPM Connectors
and Guide Pins

IPM Blocks

Figure 8-13. IPM Driver board connections

8-18 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

5. Unscrew and retain the 4 mounting screws. The IPM Driver board is
connected to the two IPMs on the lower part of the board. Gently pull the
board straight out to disconnect it from the IPM blocks.
6. Carefully connect the replacement IPM Driver board to the IPMs,
directing the board’s guide pin holes over the guide pins and ensuring
that the pins on each connector mate correctly.
7. Secure the IPM Driver board with the 4 mounting screws.
8. Reconnect all cable connectors to the IPM Driver board.
9. Reinstall the cover and reapply power.

8.8.5 Replacing an IPM Block


If you are replacing a 654-5001P1 with a 654-5001P2, you must replace:
• both IPM blocks
• both snubber cap assemblies, with a 122-5119G1 snubber cap assembly
• the 124-5130G1 IPM Driver board, with a 124-5144G1 IPM Driver board
(See “Replacing the IPM Driver Board” on page 8-17)
To determine the part number for your IPM blocks, confirm the color of the
base, as shown in Figure 8-13. The 654-5001P1 uses a silver-colored base,
while the 654-5001P2 uses a copper base.

654-5001P1
(Silver Baseplate)

654-5001P2
(Copper Baseplate)

Figure 8-14. IPM block part number identification

To replace a 654-5001P1 or 654-5001P2 IPM block, perform the following


steps.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)
• thermal grease

8 Component Replacement 8-19


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to Section “Removing the Upper
Cabinet Cover” on page 8-3.
4. Unscrew and retain the 4 IPM Driver board mounting screws. The IPM
Driver board is connected to the two IPMs on the lower part of the board.

8-20 8 Component Replacement


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Gently pull the board straight out to disconnect it from the IPM blocks
(Figure 8-13).
IPM Driver Board

IPM Connectors
and Guide Pins

IPM Blocks

Copper Rails

Snubber Cap Assemblies

Figure 8-15. IPM connections

5. Disconnect the wires connected to the faulty IPM block.


6. Remove the copper rails and snubber capacitors that attach to the IPM
blocks.
7. Remove the 4 mounting screws that secure the faulty IPM block to the
mounting plate.
8. Apply thermal grease to the back of the replacement IPM block and mount
it to the mounting plate with the 4 mounting screws.
9. If replacing a 654-5001P1 with a 654-5001P2, for each snubber cap assembly:
a. Cut the cable tie that binds the snubber cap assembly to the larger black
box-like capacitor.
b. Use an 8” cable tie to bind the replacement snubber cap assembly (122-
5119G1) to the existing black capacitor. See Figure 8-13.
10. Reattach the copper rails and snubber capacitor bundles.
11. Reconnect the remaining wires to the IPM block.
12. Carefully reconnect the IPM Driver board to the IPMs, ensuring that the 4
guide pins are aligned and the connector pins mate correctly.
13. Secure the IPM Driver board with the 4 mounting screws.

8 Component Replacement 8-21


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

14. Reconnect all cable connectors to the IPM Driver board.


15. Reinstall the cover and reapply power.

8.8.6 Replacing the Room Interface Board


To replace the 124-5162G1 Room Interface board, perform the following steps.

Tools Required
• standard hand tool kit (screwdrivers, wrenches, etc.)

Warning
To avoid serious injury, before servicing the generator, turn off all
electrical power to the generator. Lock out the power source and tag it
“Equipment Being Serviced.”

Never perform any service work inside the generator without first
performing the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.

Caution
Always use an anti-static wrist strap when working on electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Perform the “Discharge Procedure” on page 6-2.


2. Turn off all power to the generator.
3. Remove upper cabinet cover according to Section “Removing the Upper
Cabinet Cover” on page 8-3.
4. Disconnect all connections to the Room Interface board (Figure 8-10).
5. Unscrew and retain the four Phillips head screws and remove the board.
6. Reassemble by reversing steps. Make sure to fit the terminal connections
on the back of the Room Interface board gently to the terminal on the back
of the Filament board.

8-22 8 Component Replacement


9 Electrical Schematics

Electrical Schematics
9
9.1 List of Electrical Schematics

This chapter contains wiring schematics for the generator.

Current
Drawing Number Description Revision
034-5089 Wiring Diagram, single-phase 5
034-5090 Wiring diagram, 3-phase 6
110-5105 HV Tank 1
124-5162 Room Interface 0
Power Supply Distribution
Line Monitor
Rotor Circuit
Filament Circuit
kV and mA Feedback, kV Drive
n/a n/a
Soft Charge, Main Contactor, and DC
Bus
AEC Circuit
Console
Room Interface
Table 9-1. List of Schematics

9 Electrical Schematics 9-1


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

9-2 9 Electrical Schematics


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

9 Electrical Schematics 9-3


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

9-4 9 Electrical Schematics


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

9 Electrical Schematics 9-5


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Main Control Board Power Relay Board


TP3
BR1 Diagram - Power Supply Distribution
J13-7 J13A-9 TB13A-9 +9V Console TB6-15
+9V Console 10VAC Del Medical
VR1 +
Anthem Generator
CB5 0V TB6-14
- 2018.05.08
To TP26A LED2 BR2
Console 16VAC TB6-13
+
VR2A TP2
+3.3VA
CB6 0V TB6-12
J13-12 +9V Console Return J13A-8 TB13A-8 +9V Console Return -

BR3
+12V1 CB1 20VAC TB6-11
TP6 +
TP23 From Toroidal
Transformer
0V TB6-10
PS1 VR3 -
+5VC

LED3 F2 24VAC TB6-9


+5V
+12V TP5
TP25
24VAC COM TB6-8
+12V J13A-2 TB13A-2
VR1 VR2
F3 120VAC TB6-7 TB4-5 TB4-3 TB6-1 TB6-2 TB6-4 TB6-3
+3.3V
Room Interface Board
TP26
-15V
TP4 120VAC COM TB6-6

VR2
PS1
VREF
TP24 LED4

VR3
120VAC 120VAC COM
+12VAEC
-12V TB7-42 TB7-41 TB7-34 TB7-33 TB7-27 TB7-28
TP20 -12VAEC PS2
TP22
J13A-3 TB13A-3
-15V
VR4
J7-42 J7-41 J7-34 J7-33 J7-27 J7-28 Filament Board
+5V

+5V J4-1 TB4-1

TP13

J13A-4 TB13A-4
+12VAEC

TP12 TB8-9
120VAC COM J8-4

J13A-5 TB13A-5
-12VAEC TP1
120VAC TB8-10 J8-3

24VAC COM TB1-1 J1-12

24VAC TB1-2 J1-11

-24VDC TB1-5 J1-8

+24VDC TB1-4 J1-9

9-6 9 Electrical Schematics


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Diagram – Line Monitor


Del Medical
Anthem Generator
2018.05.08
Power Relay Board

LED1
TB7-1
In

Toroidal
Transformer
Thermal Switch +12VS
TB7-2 TP10

+12VS
VR4 Line monitor /
TB1-8 TB7-3 comparator circuit

3 Phase
External Line Match
Transformer
Thermal Switches TB3-9 TB7-4
+12VS
TP10B
TB7-3
+12VSB
Single Phase VR4B
Power Module Line
Match Transformer
Thermal Switch TB7-4

TP11
In Out

240VAC TB7-5
TB1-3
Single Phase
From Power Module
TB1 0VAC TB7-6
TB1-1

BR5
240VAC TB7-5 240VAC T1 V-A
3 Phase TB2-3 +
From External Line
Match Transformer 240VAC TB7-6 240VAC COM
TB3-3 - +12VS

D5

CB4 TB6-1
To Toroidal
TB6-2 Transformer

K11

9 Electrical Schematics 9-7


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Diagram – Rotor Circuit Power Relay Board Filament Board


Del Medical QC6
QC5
Anthem Generator +12V1 + -

2018.05.08 TB7-5 SSR


240VAC
Single Phase TB1-3 QC8 QC7 Rotor COM TB1-8 J1-5 Rotor COM J7-21
AC AC
From Power Module TB7-6 0V
TB1 TB1-1 J7-19
Rotor Main
K9 F4 To Room
J7-20 Interface
TB7-5 240VAC Rotor Phase
3 Phase TB2-3
From External Line R7 TB1-12 J1-1 J7-12
TB7-6 240VAC COM Rotor Main
Match Transformer TB3-3

Prep
+12V1
To Console
TB1-10 J1-3
In In

J13-2 R10 +5V


Main Control Board +12V
Rotor
Feedback
In Circuit +12V1

+3.3VA

TP1 Out

U42 J5-14 TB5-14


1 5 Prep
QC1 QC2 Rotor Phase
2 4

In

U2-11 VREF +12VDC


TP26 TP9

+5V
+3.3V
TP37 +12VDC
U1-9
Rotor Current
VREF Rotor FB Sensing Circuit
Data BUS and In Out In

Microprocessor
TP41 LED4 U100-1
Out

Rotor Start J4-6 TB4-6


Out TB3-12 J3-12 SSR
U34-4
OC3-3
J4-9 TB4-9 Buffer Circuit +12VDC
Boost J3-14 R115 D101
Out TB3-14

U27-6
U1-13 U4-16 U4-6

Rotor Ready J4-11 TB4-11 Out


In TB3-6 J3-6 Rotor Start
In Out In

U28-2 U3-3 U4-14 U4-7


In Rotor Drive
J5-11 TB5-11
Therm SW TB3-9 J3-9 Boost
In Out In

U7-8 RN2-10 U100-13

TP22 TP15 TB3-11 J3-11 Rotor Ready


In Out

U7-3 RN2-12

TB3-12 J3-12 Thermal SW


In Out

9-8 9 Electrical Schematics


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Main Control Board Diagram – Filament / mA Drive and Feedback Circuit Filament Board
Del Medical
Anthem Generator TB1-2
X-SM
2018.05.08
HV Cable length
To HV Tank TB1-1 X-LG compensation
jumpers J4, J5, J6
+12VDC

+3.3V +5V -12V +12V TB1-3


X-COM

K1
TP52
From Toroidal

X-Select
TP2

X-Out
FIL HI Fault Transformer
Out

TP51 +12V TB6-4 TB6-3 TB6-5


LED2
TP53
Power Relay Board FIL +50V
Out Out
MA HI Fault In
Out

R81 12
TP3
TP50 Out
MA ACT 8
FIL DR1 BR4
16
CB2 TB8-7 J8-6
36VAC
+
FIL PCB Fault Out TP54
U13 LED3
CB3 TB8-5 J8-8
36VAC - FIL -50V
U20-5 R84 MA / Fil Ref In
Out 15 11
FIL DR2 TP1
7 TB8-6 J8-7
FIL EN In
FIL COM
FIL COM
TP44 TP4

FIL REF J4-2 TB4-2 TB3-2 J3-2 FIL DR1


In FIL DR1 In

TP45 TP5

J4-3 TB4-3 TB3-3 J3-3 FIL DR2


MA REF FIL DR2 In
In
U15-10 TP6
TP48 Filament drive,
FIL FB1 J4-7 TB4-7 FIL FB1 TB3-7 J3-7 FIL FB1 amplification, and feedback
In Out
circuit
FIL FB Main Board
Out U15-1 TP7
I/O
FIL FB2 J4-8 TB4-8 FIL FB2 TB3-8 J3-8 FIL FB2
In Out

TP1
TP9

TP22

+12V +5V

TP40 U3-1 U4-15 U4-2

X-Select J4-10 TB4-10 X-Select TB3-10 J3-10 X-Select


Out In Out In

Buffer +12VDC
Circuit
Out
U18-12 U7-6 OC5-4 TP6

RN2 LED1
J4-4 TB4-4 FIL Fault TB3-4 J3-4
In FIL Fault In Out
6 11 FIL Fault

Continued on
diagram Filament,
mA, and KV Drive

9 Electrical Schematics 9-9


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Diagram – KV and mA Feedback, KV Drive


Del Medical
Anthem Generator
2018.05.08
From HV Tank
From Console Interface Board From DC BUS

J13-2 J13-4 J14-1 J14-2 J14-3 J14-4 J6-1 J6-3


Main Control Board IPM Driver Board
Continued on DC BUS
In
diagram Filament +3.3VA
Circuit
U41 TP9
1 5
DC BUS +12V
Expose 2 4 Detection
+15V Out
LED1A In
TP2 J1
TP10 Drive
+3.3VA PS1 IPM1

Out
Circuit
U42 Out Out P
1 5 -15V In
In
Prep 2 4
TP1

TP9
LED2

+15V
TP11
+12V
TP2
2 1 Out
+15V In
In In In
TP13 KV+ U5 TP12 J2
In Drive

Out
PS2 IPM1
mA 4 5 Circuit
FIL HI Fault SC Complete In N
In In Out -15V In
In
TP3
TP12

In
KV-
MA HI Fault IPM Fault
In In Out
R22 TP3
TP6
BUS Monitor J3-7 J5-7 BUS Monitor TP13
In +12V
FIL PCB Fault In In KV FB Out
U6-1 TP4 +15V Out
In
TP8 TP14 J3
SC Complete J3-6 J5-6 Drive

Out
Data BUS and Main Board In SC Complete PS3 IPM2
Circuit
FIL EN Microprocessor KV EN I/O P
Out Out In -15V In
U6-5 TP7 In
TP10
IPM Fault J3-5 J5-5
In IPM Fault
FIL REF In KV IMB Fault Out
Out
U5-11 TP6B
TP11
KV DR2 J3-4 J5-4 KV DR2 TP15
Out +12V
MA REF KV HT Fault
Out In Out
U5-8 TP6A +15V Out
In
TP7
J3-3 J5-3 TP16 J4
KV DR1 KV DR1 Drive

Out
Out PS4 IPM2
FIL FB KV REF Circuit
In Out In
-15V N
In
+12V In

TP22 J3-2 J5-2


Out Out +12V

TP22A TP6A
1V=20KV
J3-1 J5-1

TP47A
SM1V=20mA
TP22B LG1V=100mA TP6
+15V

TP5
PS5

9-10 9 Electrical Schematics


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Main Control Board


U42 J13-2
4 2 Prep TB1-4 280VAC TB1-1 280VAC
From
5 1
J13-4 Console +
Expose Single Phase 3 Phase
Power Module Power Module TB1-2 280VAC
TB1 TB1
-
+3.3VA TB1-6 0VAC TB1-3 280VAC
U41
4 2

5 1

Power Relay Board F1 TB6-16


0V

+3.3VA From Toroidal


Transformer

24VAC TB6-17
In In

K1

U2-16

K1 TB6-18
+12V1

Out +12V1

U32-10 U1-1 Buffer TB6-19


K1
Circuit
MC EN J5-1 TB5-1
Out In

QC12
+5V IPM2
+12V1

Data BUS and


Microprocessor QC10
K12

U4-13

QC9

TP42 U3-5

SC EN J4-13 TB4-13 Out


QC11
Out In

Buffer
Circuit

TP22 TP1 IPM1

+5V Diagram – Soft Charge, Main


Contactor, and DC BUS
Del Medical
Anthem Generator
2018.05.08

To IPM Driver
Board J6

To HT Tank

9 Electrical Schematics 9-11


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

AEC circuit diagram

Main Control Board Diagram – AEC Circuit


+12VAEC J21-9
TP300 Del Medical
U304
4 12 Anthem Generator
14
13
J21-8 2018.05.08
+12VAEC 11 +12VAEC
P2
J21-7
8 2
W AEC Stop 7 -12VAEC -12VAEC
In W AEC REF
3
1 R317 6 R315
R318 W AEC Ramp
9 7 2
U300 8 5 1 J21-5
10 3
U304
TP302 U304 U304
To Wall Chamber
R300 U301 J21-4
Out
AEC REF 12
14
13

J21-6
TP22C

R303 U301 10
J21-3
In
W AEC FB 8
9 +5V +12VAEC
J21-2

U305-1 U305-15

Center Sel Center


Out In Out

U305-3 U305-13

Out Left Sel In Out Left

U306-1 U306-15

Right Sel Buffer Circuit


Out In Out Right

U305-5 U305-11

Data BUS and Out W Start In Out W Start


Microprocessor
U306-3 U306-13

Out T Start In Out T Start

TP300 +12VAEC
U303
4 12 J19-2
14
13
11
+12VAEC P1
J19-3
8 2
T AEC Stop 7 -12VAEC
In T AEC REF
3
1 R311 6 R313
R310 9 7 2 J19-6
U302 T AEC Ramp 8 5 1
10 3
U303
TP303 U304 U303
J19-5
AEC REF R305 3
U301
Out 1
2 To Table Chamber
J19-4

J19-7
U301 -12VAEC
R308 5
In T AEC FB 7
6
J19-8
+12VAEC

J19-9

9-12 9 Electrical Schematics


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Diagram – Console
Del Medical Prep / Expose Board
Console Board J10-1
Anthem Generator +5V
2018.05.08 Prep SW J10-5 Prep

Expose SW J10-4 Expose

Main Control Board J10-6


U42 J13-2 J5-6
4 2
R58 R59 Ready LED J10-2 Ready
Prep 5 1

X-Ray LED J10-1 X-Ray


J13-1 J5-7

+3.3V +3.3V J11-2 Prep


+3.3VA
R13 R14 J11-3 Expose
U41 TP6
4 2
+5VC D2 J11-1
Expose 5 1 Hand Switch
ENA In
R16
TP7
D1 Rotary Encoder
J12-1
ENB In
In In
+3.3VA R15 J12-2
In In Out Out
J12-3
In
In

TP16 TP4 +5V

CAN HI J13-10 J5-13


J4
TP17 TP3 LCD Display

J13-11 J5-14
CAN LO
+5V1
TP15
LCD Backlight
HV +300VAC J2-1
Data BUS and J13-1 J5-10 Console Data
CAN GND
Microprocessor BUS and
Microprocessor PS2

HV RTN J2-4

LED1
Heartbeat +3.3V

J1

+3.3V
+3.3V
Membrane
+3.3V Switches

8/9

J13 SD
Card
3/6
TP15 TP22 TP5

+5VC +5V1
C2+ C4B+

VR1A
PS1
+3.3V +5V
TP2 C4+ C3+

J7-1 Power Switch


VR2 VR1

J13-9 J13-9 J7-3


9V Console
TP1
J13-12 J13-12
9V Console Return

9 Electrical Schematics 9-13


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

Diagram –Room Interface


Del Medical
Anthem Generator Power Relay Board TB2-1 J2-1 J7-9 TB7-9 Room Interface Board TB1-1
INTL COM
2018.05.08
TB2-3 J2-3 J7-7 TB7-7 TB1-2
Collimator INTL
+5V +12V
TB2-2 J2-2 J7-8 TB7-8 TB1-3
Main Control Board Door INTL

U27-9 U6-6 RN2-15 TB8-2 J8-12 J7-2 TB7-2 TB1-6


Room Light
+24VDC
J5-3 TB5-3 Collimator INTL TB8-1 J8-11 J7-1 TB7-1 TB1-7
In Out In -24VDC Room Light 1
U27-8 U6-3 RN2-16

J5-2 TB5-2 Door INTL


In Out In

U27-4 U6-8 Buffer and RN2-14 K1


Coupling Circuit Room Light 2
J5-8 TB5-8 TB8-12 J8-1 J7-39 TB7-39 TB4-1
Wall RDY Wall SEL
In Out In
U27-5 U6-11 RN2-13 TB2-8 J2-8 J7-11 TB7-11 TB4-2
Wall RDY

J5-10 TB5-10 TB4-3


In Table RDY Out In 120 VAC
TB2-10 J2-10 J7-13 TB7-13 Wall RDY COM TB4-4

TB4-5
120 VAC COM
TP1
TP22

TB8-11 J8-2 J7-40 TB7-39 Table SEL TB5-1

TB2-9 J2-9 J7-14 TB7-11 Table RDY TB5-2

+12V1 120 VAC TB5-3


120 VAC
Filament
Table RDY COM TB5-4
Board
Data BUS and TB5-5
Microprocessor 120 VAC COM
K4

TB2-1

TB2-2

TB2-3
+5V
TB2-4

U31-10 U1-3 U2-14

W STRT J5-7 TB5-7


Out In Out TB8-1
W EXP REQ

W EXP REQ TB8-2

TB8-3
120 VAC
K3 K2
K5 TB8-4

U31-8 U1-5 Buffer U2-13 Prep + TB8-5


Circuit
Prep - TB8-6
T STRT J5-9 TB5-9
Out In Out
120 VAC COM 120 VAC COM
T EXP REQ
+12V1
+12V1
T EXP REQ
TB7-20 Phase TB3-1
U42
4 2
TB7-19 Main TB3-2
Prep 5 1 From Rotor
K6 Circuit TB7-21
U1-9 U2-12 COM TB3-3

J5-14 TB5-14 TB7-12 Thermal SW TB3-4


Prep In Out
+3.3VA Thermal SW COM TB3-5

9-14 9 Electrical Schematics


10 Illustrated Parts List

Illustrated Parts List


10
10.1 Ordering Parts
You can order replacement parts, fluids, and accessories from Del Medical by
telephone, fax, or email. Please have the following information available:
• your name
• telephone number
• PO (Purchase Order) number
• part numbers and quantities of all items required
• shipping address
• preferred method of delivery

10.1.1 To Order by Telephone


Call Del Medical Inc. at 1-800-800-6006 and speak to one of our Customer
Service Representatives. Telephone hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday
through Friday (Central Standard Time or Central Daylight Time).

10.1.2 To Order by Fax


Fax your order to Del Medical Inc. at 1-800-288-7011. Fax orders can be sent 24
hours a day, 7 days a week.

10.1.3 To Order by Email


Email your order to Del Medical Inc. at orders@delmedical.com. Email orders
can be sent 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

10.1.4 Parts Assistance by Email


For part identification and equipment technical support, send queries to
support@delmedical.com.

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-1


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10.2 Assembly Drawing Summary


This chapter contains illustrations and part numbers necessary for Anthem
replacement parts and assemblies.
Each illustration includes a parts list. The quantities listed are required to
complete the assembly, and might not reflect the quantity needed for the
entire system. Some assembly illustrations span more than one sheet.

Current
Drawing Number Description Revision
110-5105 HV tank 1
110-5115 Single phase power module 9
110-5115 Single phase power module, in table 9
110-5116 3-phase power module 9
110-5116 3-phase power module, in table 9
112-5469 Base power module 2
112-5471 Door power module 7
112-5472 Inverter power module 1
112-5484 lower cabinet 4
112-5485 Line Match Transformer Ext Assembly 4
112-5465 Control Console Assembly 4
Table 10-1. List of assembly drawings

10.3 Firmware Versions


The Main Control board and the Console board both contain firmware. To
function correctly together, both boards must contain the current versions of
their respective firmware, which are as follows:
• Main Control board, I-06/03/15
• Console board, C-01/01/16
To view/confirm both versions installed in your Anthem generator, turn the
Anthem Console power switch from off to on and watch the display. For a
brief period, you see the startup screen, which identifies system configuration.
On this screen, the third line appears as follows:
C-01/01/16 I-06/03/15 D-01/25/12

10-2 10 Illustrated Parts List


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10.4 Recommended Spare Parts


The following items are included in spare parts kit 112-5567G1, and can also
be ordered separately.

Part Number Description Qty


**124-5144G1 PCB, IPM Driver Board 1
**124-5131G1 PCB, Filament Board 1
124-5136G2 PCB, Power/Relay Board 1
124-5162G1 PCB, Room Interface Board 1
*124-5132G2 PCB, Main Control Board w/AEC 1
*124-5133G1 PCB, Console Board 1
124-5046G1 PCB, Prep/Expose 1
623-5007P1 LCD Display, 320 x 240 1
**654-5001P2 IPM block, 600V 400A Power Module 2
46-170021P41 Fuse, 1A, 250V, Time Delay, F1 7
646-5020P1 Fuse, 8A, 250V, Time Delay, F2 7
46-170021P30 Fuse, 2A, 250V, SB, F3 7
46-170021P74 Fuse, 10A, 250V, Slo-Blo, F4 7
112-5603G1 Kit, Contactor, 3-Pole 1
621-0015P3 Diode Pack 1
610-0022P1 Capacitor, 30uF, 370V 1
611-0029P6 Capacitor, 8000uF, 450V 1
422-5030P1 Screw, Phillips Hex Head M6 x 12 mm 6
653-5005P1 Mat, Static Protection 1
122-5119G1 Assembly, Snubber 2
653-5004P1S Programmer, MCU 1
639-5001P1 Battery, CR 2016 Lithium Coin 90mAh 1
20 mm, included on 124-5133G1
* Must be pre-programmed for kW, AEC, and software before shipment. When
ordering, consult Del Medical Technical Support to confirm required version.
** When ordering, consult Del Medical Technical Support to confirm required ver-
sion.
Table 10-2. Anthem spare parts kit - 112-5567G1
The following recommended spare parts are available separately.

Part Number Description Qty


120-5017G1 Exposure Hand Switch 1
122-0117G3 Exposure Footswitch (veterinary systems) 1
Table 10-3. Anthem individual spare parts

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-3


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10-4 10 Illustrated Parts List


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

110-5142G1-G10

35235,(7$5<$1'&21),'(17,$/ 
7+(,1)250$7,21&217$,1(',17+,6
'5$:,1*,67+(62/(3523(57<
$60+97$1.
2)'(/0(',&$/$1<5(352'8&7,21,1
3$5725$6$:+2/(:,7+2877+(:5,77(1 5(9
3(50,66,212)'(/0(',&$/,6352+,%,7('

%/220,1*'$/(,/

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-5


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8000uF

10-6 10 Illustrated Parts List


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8000uF

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-7


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

8000uF
8000uF

10-8 10 Illustrated Parts List


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-9


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10-10 10 Illustrated Parts List


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-11


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

112-5700G1/G2/G3

10-12 10 Illustrated Parts List


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

112-5700G1/G2/G3
$






 





& & 

* $60/2:(5&$%,1(73+

* $60/2:(5&$%,1(73+
$
6(&7,21$$
,7(012 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21 *47< *47<
 3 (48,30(17&$%,1(7  
   187+(;.(36  
  3 /$%(/($57+*5281'  
  6&5(:++06[  
 3 /$%(/6(5,$//2:(5&$%,1(73+  
 * +$51(66/2:(5&$%,1(7  
   6&5(:331+066(06[  
   3 75$16)250(53+$6(/,1(0$7&+  
  3 %5$&.(77(50,1$/675,3  

  3 7(50,1$/%/2&.326  
 3 /$%(/7(50,1$/675,33+;)05  
   3 /$%(/7%3+;)05 7%  
  3 /$%(/7%3+;)05 7%  
  3 /$%(/7%3+;)05 7%  
   187+(;.(36  
  :$6+(5)/$7  
   :$6+(563/,7/.67'  
   6&5(:++06;  
 3 /$%(/6(5,$//2:(5&$%,1(73+  

  3 7$*<(//2:&$87,21  

    * &$%/(3+$6(*(132:(5  



6(&7,21&&
   
35235,(7$5<$1'&21),'(17,$/

     7+(,1)250$7,21&217$,1(',17+,6 $60/2:(5&$%,1(7
  
'5$:,1*,67+(62/(3523(57<
2)'(/0(',&$/$1<5(352'8&7,21,1 5HY
   3$5725$6$:+2/(:,7+2877+(:5,77(1
 
 * *
3(50,66,212)'(/0(',&$/,6352+,%,7('

%/220,1*'$/(,/

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-13


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10-14 10 Illustrated Parts List


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10 Illustrated Parts List 10-15


Anthem Installation, Operation, & Service Manual

10-16 10 Illustrated Parts List

You might also like